X6
X6 M
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
It contains important information on vehicle operation that will
help you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Please also note the additional items of onboard literature, for
instance the BMW X6 M Supplementary Owner's Manual.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
© 2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
English VII/13, 08 13 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 308.
6 Notes
At a glance
12 Cockpit
18 iDrive
25 Voice activation system
Controls
30 Opening and closing
44 Adjusting
54 Transporting children safely
59 Driving
70 Displays
81 Lamps
86 Safety
96 Driving stability control systems
102 Driving comfort
121 Climate
129 Interior equipment
137 Storage compartments
Driving tips
146 Things to remember when driving
150 Loading
153 Saving fuel
Navigation
158 Navigation system
160 Destination entry
169 Destination guidance
177 What to do if...
Entertainment
180 Tone
182 Radio
190 CD/multimedia
210 DVD system in rear
Communication
226 Telephone
239 Office
248 Contacts
251 ConnectedDrive
Mobility
258 Refueling
260 Fuel
262 Wheels and tires
270 Engine compartment
274 Maintenance
276 Replacing components
286 Breakdown assistance
291 Care
Reference
298 Technical data
300 Short commands for voice activation
system
308 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any questions, your service
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the ve‐
hicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐
tion.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐
lect individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐
tivation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
mation on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models, all
series equipment, as well as country-specific
and special equipment offered in the model
series.Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de‐
scribes and depicts equipment that may not be
contained in your vehicle because of the se‐
lected special equipment or country version,
for example.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
For options and equipment not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐
plementary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls
are arranged differently than shown in the illus‐
trations.
Status of this Owner's
Manual at time of printing
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐
pendix of the printed quick reference for the
vehicle.
For your own safety
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery
— homologation. If your vehicle is to be oper‐
ated in a different country it might be neces‐
Seite 6
Notes
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differ‐
ing operating conditions and permit
requirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you cannot lodge warranty claims
for your vehicle there. Further information can
be obtained from your Service Centre.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair
methods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐
chase accessories tested and approved by
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐
ously acquire the assurance that they have
been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure op‐
timum performance when installed on your ve‐
hicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free
from defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and acces‐
sories not approved by BMW. BMW cannot
test every product made by other manufactur‐
ers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely
and without risk to either the vehicle, its opera‐
tion, or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts,
BMW Accessories and other products ap‐
proved by BMW, together with professional
advice on using these items, are available from
all BMW centers. Installation and operation of
non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,
wheels, suspension components, brake dust
shields, telephones, including operation of any
mobile phone from within the vehicle without
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's
electrical system or affect the validity of the
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐
placement, or repair of the emission control
devices and systems may be performed by any
automotive repair establishment or individual
using any certified automotive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty
Seite 7
Notes
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
Numerous electronic components in your vehi‐
cle contain data memories that store technical
information on the vehicle condition, events
and faults, either temporarily or permanently.
This technical information generally docu‐
ments the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment.
▷ Operating conditions of system compo‐
nents, such as filling levels.
▷ Status messages from the vehicle and its
individual components, such as wheel rpm/
speed, motion delay, transverse accelera‐
tion.
▷ Malfunctions and defects in important sys‐
tem components, such as lights and
brakes.
▷ Vehicle responses to special driving situa‐
tions, such as airbag deployment, use of
the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as the tempera‐
ture.
These data are of a technical nature only and
are used to detect and eliminate faults and to
optimize vehicle functions. Travel profiles of
routes driven with the vehicle cannot be cre‐
ated from these data. If services are used, for
instance in the event of repairs, service proc‐
esses, warranty cases, quality assurance, etc.,
this technical information can be read out from
the event and fault data memories by service
personnel, including the manufacturer, using
special diagnosis tools. This service personnel
can provide you with more information if
needed. After troubleshooting, the information
in the fault memory is cleared or overwritten
continuously.
Situations are conceivable during the use of
the vehicle in which these technical data could
become associated with a specific person in
combination with other information, such as an
accident report, damage to the vehicle, wit‐
ness accounts, etc., possibly with the involve‐
ment of an authorized expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐
calization in the event of an emergency, permit
Seite 8
Notes
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the
vehicle.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety- related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele‐
phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
Seite 9
Notes
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Rear window safety switch 42
2 Power windows 41
3 Exterior mirror operation 51
4 Lamps
Instrument lighting 85
Front fog lamps 84
Seite 12
At a glance Cockpit
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Parking lamps 81
Low beams 81
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 82
Adaptive Light Control 82
High-beam Assistant 83
5 Head-up Display 118
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 64
High beams, head‐
lamp flasher 83
High-beam Assistant 83
Roadside parking lamps 83
Computer 72
Settings and information about
the vehicle 70
7 Upshifting or downshifting with an auto‐
matic transmission 67
8 Instrument cluster 14
9 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 65
Rain sensor 66
10 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 59
11 Ignition lock 59
12 Steering wheel buttons, right
Change the radio station
Stopping a traffic announcement
Select a music track
Scroll through the redial list
Next entertainment source
Recirculated-air mode 124
Steering wheel heating 53
Lane departure warning 93
13 Horn, the entire surface
14
15 Cruise control lever
Cruise control 109
Active cruise control 102
16 Steering wheel buttons, left
Telephone 226
Volume
Activate/deactivate the voice acti‐
vation system 25
17 Releasing the hood 270
Seite 13
Cockpit At a glance
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Instrument cluster
1 Turn signal indicator lamp
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator/warning lamps 15
4 Active Cruise Control 102
5 Tachometer 71
6 Engine oil temperature 71 or current
consumption 71
7 Display for
▷ Clock 70
▷ External temperature 70
▷ Indicator/warning lamps 15
▷ Cruise control 109
▷ Active Cruise Control 102
8 Display for
▷ Automatic transmission position 67
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control 99
▷ Computer 72
▷ Date of next scheduled service, and re‐
maining distance to be driven 74
▷ Odometer and trip odometer 70
▷ High-beam Assistant 83
▷
Check Control message
present 76
▷ Adaptive Drive: sport chassis and sus‐
pension tuning 100
9 Fuel gauge 72
10 Resetting the trip odometer 70
Viewing service requirement display 71
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Indicator/warning lamps
The concept
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning when the engine is started or the
ignition is switched on, and light up briefly.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Con‐
trol Display explain the meaning of the dis‐
played indicator and warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
You can call up more information, e.g., on the
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, refer to page 76.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text
messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
Symbol Function or system
Parking brake set, refer to
page 61
Canada: parking brake set, refer to
page 61.
High beams/headlamp flasher, refer
to page 83
Front fog lamps, refer to page 84
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC controls the drive and
braking forces for maintaining vehi‐
cle stability, refer to page 96
Engine malfunction with adverse ef‐
fect on emissions, refer to
page 275
Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
All around the center console
1 Headliner 17
2 Control Display 19
3 Hazard warning system 286
Central locking system 35
4 Opening glove compartment 137
5 Automatic climate control with 2-zone con‐
trol 122
Automatic climate control with 4-zone con‐
trol 126
6 Radio and CD/DVD drive 182
7 Opening tailgate 36
Active seat 47
Park Distance Control PDC 111
Top View 115
rearview camera 113
HDC Hill Descent Control 97
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 96
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 97
Side View 117
8 Controller with buttons 18
9 Automatic Hold 62
10 Parking brake 61
11 Adaptive Drive 100
12 Selector lever for automatic transmis‐
sion 67
All around the headliner
1 Emergency Request 286
2 Glass sunroof 42
3 Indicator lamp for the front pas‐
senger airbags 88
4 Reading lamps 85
5 Interior lamps 85
Seite 17
Cockpit At a glance
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
iDrive
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of a multi‐
tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be
operated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other road users, never at‐
tempt to use the controls or enter information
unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Controls
1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons
Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
The buttons can be used to open the me‐
nus directly. The controller can be used to
select menu items and create the settings.
The buttons can be used to open the me‐
nus directly. The controller can be used to
select menu items and create the settings.
▷ Move in four directions, arrow 3
▷ Turn, arrow 4
▷ Push, arrow 5
Buttons on controller
Press the but‐
ton
Function
MENU Opens the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia
menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Control Display
Notes
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions, refer to page 294.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Switching off
1. Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previ‐
ous panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐
ous display.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens
with the panel that was last selected in that
menu. To display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Switch off control
display".
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Store
station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
1.
Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped into various catego‐
ries.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio™ is switched on.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception
strength Symbol flashes: searching
for network.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Symbol Meaning
Roaming is active.
Text message, e-mail was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter the PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.
Music interface for smartphones.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched
off.
Request of the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Switching the split screen on and off
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Saving a function
1.
Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2.
Press the desired button for more
than two seconds.
Running a function
Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
▷ To display short information: touch the
button.
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Entering letters and numbers
1.
Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Enter a blank space.
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering letters and numbers.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
Switching between upper and lower
case letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering uppercase and lowercase let‐
ters.
Symbol Function
Move the controller forward:
switch from upper to lower case
letters.
Move the controller forward:
switch from lower to upper case
letters.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during the
entry for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can
be entered using the spelling of language
available on the Control Display.
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
The concept
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the
Control Display can be operated with the
voice activation system using spoken com‐
mands. The system prompts you to make
your entries.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated
using the voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone lo‐
cated in the area of the interior rearview
mirror.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation
system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 79.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The command appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function via iDrive in this case.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steer‐
ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
The functions of the main menu have short
commands.
Some list items, such as the phone book en‐
tries, can also be selected via the voice activa‐
tion system. Say the list items exactly as they
are displayed on the list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the system read possible com‐
mands aloud: ›Voice commands‹.
Seite 25
Voice activation system At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐
played, the commands for the settings are
read out loud.
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
directly by means of short commands, usually
irrespective of which menu item is currently
selected, for instance ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, refer to page 300.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐
portant commands for them are an‐
nounced.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.
Example: playing back a CD
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
out loud, in the same way as they are selected
via the controller.
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D and multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back.
4. ›C D‹
5. ›C D drive‹
The CD is played back.
6.
Press the button on the steering
wheel again to select a specific track.
7. ›Track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Via short commands
Playback of the CD can also be started using a
short command.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D drive Track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use
the standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the
announcements from the system are issued in
an abbreviated form.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume knob while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
Seite 26
At a glance Voice activation system
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 286, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 27
Voice activation system At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening tailgate
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with keys.
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice
a year for longer road trips in order to maintain
the batteries' charge status.
In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 39.
The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which re‐
mote control is used to unlock the vehicle, re‐
fer to Personal Profile.
In addition, information about service require‐
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 274.
Integrated key
Press button 1 and pull out the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door, refer to page 34.
▷ Cargo floor cover in cargo area, refer to
page 140.
New remote controls
You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center.
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
Seite 30
Controls Opening and closing
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated in the remote
control.
▷ The remote control used is detected when
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro‐
file is called up.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone
else with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for a maxi‐
mum of four remote controls. They are stored
for two remote controls if Comfort Access is in
use.
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
More information on the settings can be found
under:
▷ Assigning the programmable memory but‐
tons, refer to page 23.
▷ Response of the central locking system
when the car is being unlocked, refer to
page 32.
▷ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 35.
▷ Driver's seat, exterior mirror and steering
wheel positions, refer to page 50.
▷ Settings for the display on the Control Dis‐
play and in the instrument cluster:
▷ 12h/24h clock format, refer to
page 78.
▷ Date format, refer to page 79.
▷ Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 79.
▷ Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 79.
▷ Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances,
and temperature, refer to page 79.
▷ Show visual warning for the Park Distance
Control PDC, refer to page 112.
▷ Show visual warning for Top View, refer to
page 115.
▷ Show Side View, refer to page 117.
▷ Backup camera:
▷ Function selection, refer to page 114.
▷ Type of display, refer to page 115.
▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/
off, refer to page 93.
▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness and
position of the display, refer to page 118.
▷ Adaptive Drive: selected chassis and sus‐
pension tuning, refer to page 100.
▷ Light settings:
▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 65.
▷ Welcome lamps, refer to page 81.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer
to page 82.
▷ Daytime running lights, refer to
page 82.
▷ High-beam Assistant, refer to
page 83.
▷ Automatic climate control with 2-zone con‐
trol: settings, refer to page 122.
▷ Navigation:
▷ Voice activation, refer to page 171.
▷ Route criteria, refer to page 169.
▷ Map view settings, refer to page 173.
▷ Entertainment:
▷ Tone control, refer to page 180.
▷ Radio, stored stations, refer to
page 188.
▷ CD/multimedia, audio source listened
to last, refer to page 190.
▷ Telephone: volume, refer to page 230.
Seite 31
Opening and closing Controls
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
▷ Doors.
▷ Tailgate.
▷ Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside
▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Via the door lock.
▷ In cars with Comfort Access, via the door
handles.
The following takes place simultaneously
when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re‐
mote control:
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system is armed or disarmed,
refer to page 40.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system,
refer to page 35.
If the vehicle is locked from the inside, the fuel
filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Opening and closing: from
the outside
Using the remote control
General information
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
can then be opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked.
The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and cour‐
tesy lamps are switched on.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button:"
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel
filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again
unlocks the entire vehicle.
Seite 32
Controls Opening and closing
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the remote
control.
The windows and the glass sunroof open.
Locking
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol.
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Switching on the interior lamps and
courtesy lamps
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol with the vehicle locked.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Unlocking tailgate
Press the button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second and release.
The tailgate will open slightly, regardless of
whether it was previously locked or unlocked.
With automatic tailgate operation: the tailgate
opens automatically.
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do
not place the remote control into the cargo
area. The tailgate is locked again as soon as it
is pushed closed.
Before and after each trip, check that the tail‐
gate has not been inadvertently unlocked.
Provide edge protection
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
steering wheel settings
The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel positions selected last are stored for the
currently used remote control.
When the vehicle is being unlocked, these po‐
sitions are automatically retrieved if the setting
is activated.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If this function is used, first make sure
that the footwell behind the driver's seat is
empty. Failure to do so could cause injury to
persons or damage to objects behind the seat
as a result of a rearward movement of the
seat.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
ory is pressed.
Seite 33
Opening and closing Controls
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Selecting automatic activation
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
Malfunctions
Local radio waves may interfere with the re‐
mote control.
In this case, unlock and lock the car at the door
lock with the integrated key.
If the car can no longer be locked with a re‐
mote control, the battery in the remote control
is discharged. Use the remote control during
an extended drive in order to recharge the bat‐
tery, refer to page 30. The remote control for
Comfort Access contains a battery that may
need to be replaced, refer to page 39.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
LX8CAS2
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
When unlocking:
1.
Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler flap.
2. Turning the key a second time unlocks the
remaining doors and the tailgate.
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, unlock or
lock the driver's door using the integrated key
in the door lock.
Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Opening and closing: from
the inside
Locking and unlocking
Press the button in the vehicle.
The doors and the tailgate are locked or un‐
locked when the front doors are closed, but
they are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened.
▷ "Lock after start. to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Unlocking and opening
▷ Press the button. The doors are
unlocked. To open, pull the door
handle above the armrest.
▷ Pull the door handle above the armrest
twice: the door is unlocked the first time
and opened the second time.
Locking
▷ Press the button. The doors are
locked.
▷ Press the lock button of a door. To prevent
you from being locked out, the opened
driver's door cannot be locked using the
lock button.
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
can then be opened from the outside.◀
Doors
Automatic soft closing
To close the doors, push lightly. It is closed au‐
tomatically.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Tailgate
Automatic tailgate operation
Adjusting opening height
You can set how far the tailgate should open.
Adjusting the opening height
When adjusting the opening height, en‐
sure that there is a clearance of at least
4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the
ceiling may not be high enough for the open
tailgate if the load situation changes.◀
1.
"Settings"
2. "Tailgate"
3. Turn the controller until the desired open‐
ing height is selected.
Opening
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
The tailgate opens automatically to the ad‐
justed opening height.
▷ Press the button on the outside of the tail‐
gate when the vehicle is unlocked.
▷ Press the button in the center
console.
▷ Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second and release.
The opening procedure is interrupted:
▷ When the engine starts.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button in the cen‐
ter console again.
▷ By pressing the button on the remote
control for a longer period.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
Closing
Keep the closing area clear
Make sure that the closing area of the
tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage
may result.◀
Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
The tailgate closes automatically when the
button on the inside of the tailgate is pressed.
To stop the closing procedure:
▷ Press the button on the inside of the tail‐
gate.
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐
gate.
The closing procedure is also stopped:
▷ When the engine starts.
▷ If the vehicle jerks while driving away.
Closing is not canceled when you put the vehi‐
cle into motion.
Automatic closing
The tailgate closes automatically without
button operation if it is weighed down by an
additional weight of approx. 11 lbs/5 kg, such
as snow or ice.◀
Manually opening or closing
In case of an electrical malfunction:
1.
Push out cover 1 on the tailgate with a
screwdriver.
2. Push the catch 2 in the direction of the ar‐
row.
3. Open or close the tailgate slowly and with‐
out making sudden movements.
Do not use force to open or close
If the tailgate offers increased resistance,
do not forcefully open or close the tailgate;
otherwise, injury or damage may result.◀
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
▷ Starting the engine.
▷ Convenient closing.
Functional requirement
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing
the buttons or via Comfort Access.
Should a short delay occur when opening or
closing the windows or the glass sunroof, the
system is checking whether a remote control is
located in the vehicle. Please repeat opening
or closing if necessary.
Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Unlocking
Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Touch the area on the door handle, arrow 2,
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the
but‐
ton.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
If a remote control is detected within the vehi‐
cle, the vehicle does not lock or is unlocked
again.
Convenient closing
Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and
hold.
The windows and glass sunroof are closed in
addition.
Monitor the closing process
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the hand
from the door handle immediately stops the
closing process.◀
Unlocking the tailgate separately
Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.
If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo
area is detected in the locked vehicle, the tail‐
gate opens again.
The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal
sounds.
Ignition on
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the
ignition on.
When doing so, do not depress the brake
pedal, otherwise the engine will start.
Starting the engine
The engine can be started or the ignition can
be switched on when a remote control is inside
the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a re‐
mote control into the ignition lock, refer to
page 59.
As long as no remote control is detected in the
vehicle, it is only possible to restart the engine
within approx. 10 seconds after it is switched
off if no door has been opened.
Switching off the engine
▷ Remote control not in ignition lock:
After switching off the engine, the trans‐
mission is automatically switched into
transmission position P.
▷ Remote control in ignition lock:
If transmission position N is engaged, the
transmission remains in this position after
the engine is switched off.
Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Malfunction
The Comfort Access functions can be distur‐
bed by local radio waves, such as by a mobile
phone in the immediate vicinity of the remote
control or when a mobile phone is being
charged in the vehicle.
If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using
the buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
To start the engine afterward, insert the re‐
mote control into the ignition switch.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot
be started.
The remote control is not in the vehicle or has
a malfunction. Take the remote control with
you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If
necessary, insert another remote control into
the ignition switch.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no lon‐
ger inside the vehicle.
After switching off the engine, the engine can
only be started again within approx. 10 sec‐
onds if no door has been opened.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message ap‐
pears on the Control Display: replace
the remote control battery.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for Comfort Access con‐
tains a battery that will need to be replaced
from time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 30.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Insert a new battery of the same type with
the positive side facing upwards.
4. Press the cover closed.
Return used battery to a recycling collec‐
tion point or to your service center.
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the vehicle: interior motion
sensor, refer to page 40.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or at the door lock, the
alarm system is armed or disarmed at the
same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the
alarm on some market-specific versions.
To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or switch on the ignition.
Tailgate and armed alarm system
The tailgate can be opened using the remote
control, even if the alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote control.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again by the alarm system. The haz‐
ard warning system flashes once.
In some market-specific versions, the tailgate
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
trol, refer to page 32.
▷ Insert the remote control all the way into
the ignition lock.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes continuously:
The system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
The indicator lamp flashes continuously af‐
ter approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion
sensor is not active.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Panic mode
In dangerous situations, trigger the alarm sys‐
tem:
Press the button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
Interior motion sensor
For the sensor to function properly, the win‐
dows and glass sunroof must be closed.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then flashes continuously.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor remain switched off until the vehicle is
locked again.
Power windows
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐
jure themselves.◀
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Closing
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenient operation via the remote control,
refer to page 32.
Convenient closing, refer to page 38, with
Comfort Access.
After the ignition is switched off
When the remote control is removed or the ig‐
nition is switched off, the windows can con‐
tinue to be operated for approx. 1 minute as
long as no door is opened.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as
a window closes, the closing action is inter‐
rupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
Do not use window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the
range of movement of the windows; otherwise,
the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Closing without the pinch protection
system
For example, if there is an external danger or if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force ex‐
ceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Safety switch
With the safety switch, the rear windows are
prevented from being opened or closed via the
switches in the rear passenger area, such as
by children.
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety function is
switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation
Press the safety switch when transport‐
ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may
result if the windows are closed without super‐
vision.◀
Roller sunblinds for the rear
side windows
Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook
onto bracket.
Do not open the window while the roller
sunblind is tilted
Do not open the window while the roller sun‐
blind is tilted; otherwise, there is a risk of dam‐
age at high speeds that may result in personal
injury.◀
Glass sunroof, electrical
General information
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐
selves.◀
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press the switch.
The closed sunroof is tilted and
the sliding visor opens slightly.
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its tilted position, oth‐
erwise the mechanism will be damaged.◀
Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The glass sunroof moves
while the switch is being
held.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof moves automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo‐
tion.
The glass sunroof and sliding visor can be
opened together. Close the sliding visor man‐
ually.
Convenient operation, refer to page 33, via the
remote control or the door lock.
Convenient closing, refer to page 38, with
Comfort Access.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
automatically
Press the switch beyond the resistance point.
The following movements are also automatic:
▷ Pressing the switch with the sunroof open:
the sunroof is tilted fully.
▷ Pressing the switch in the Open direction
with the sunroof tilted: the sunroof is
opened fully.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Comfort position
In the comfort position, the roof is not fully
open. This reduces wind noise in the passen‐
ger compartment.
Each time the glass sunroof is opened or
closed all the way, it stops in the comfort posi‐
tion. If desired, continue the motion following
this with the switch.
After the ignition is switched off
The roof can still be operated for approx. 1 mi‐
nute, as long as no door has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again fully.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check
that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise,
the closing action may not be interrupted in
certain extreme situations, such as when thin
objects are present.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1.
Press the switch forward beyond the re‐
sistance point and hold. The pinch protec‐
tion system is limited and the sunroof
opens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Within about 4 seconds, slide the switch
forward again beyond the resistance point
and hold it there. The roof closes without
the pinch protection system.
Initialization after a power failure
After a power failure, it is only possible to raise
the roof, if necessary.
Have the system initialized by your service
center.
Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 47.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 49.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 86.
Seats
Note before adjusting
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat
while driving. The seat could respond with un‐
expected movement and the ensuing loss of
vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Do not incline the backrest on the front pas‐
senger side too far to the rear during driving.
Otherwise, there is the danger of sliding under
the safety belt in an accident. This would elimi‐
nate the protection normally provided by the
belt.◀
Adjusting manually
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat into the de‐
sired position. After releasing the lever, move
the seat forward or back slightly to make sure it
engages properly.
Thigh support
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for‐
ward or back.
Seite 44
Controls Adjusting
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Adjusting electrically
1 Forward/backward
2 Height
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest
Differs depending on seat:
1 Backrest
2 Height
Additional depending on seat:
1 Backrest width
2 Shoulder support
3 Thigh support
4 Lumbar support
Backrest width
The width of the backrest can be changed with
the side wings to adjust the side support to
your own needs.
Shoulder support
This also supports the back in the shoulder
area, This creates a relaxed sitting position and
helps relieve stress on the shoulder muscles.
The shoulder support is also used to adjust the
distance of the head restraint from the back of
the seat occupant's head.
Lumbar support
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar re‐
gion.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup‐
plementary support to help you maintain a re‐
laxed, upright sitting position.
Seite 45
Adjusting Controls
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Increase or decrease curvature:
Press front or rear section of switch.
▷ Shift curvature up or down:
Press upper or lower section of switch.
Seat heating
Front
The temperature setting progresses one step
through its control sequence each time you
press the button. The maximum temperature is
reached when three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature set last.
To switch off: press and hold the button.
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down
to no heat in order to reduce the load on the
battery. The LEDs remain lit.
Rear
Operation similar to front seat heating, without
temperature distribution.
Active seat ventilation and
seat heating
Front
1 Seat heating
2 Active seat ventilation
Press button 1 or 2 once depending on the
temperature or ventilation position. The LED in
the respective button lights up.
The temperature and ventilation levels are dis‐
played in bar form on the Control Display. A
display of three bars indicates the highest level
of seat heating or seat ventilation.
The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower
may be switched off entirely to save on battery
power. The LEDs remain lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature set last.
To switch off: press and hold button 1 or 2.
Temperature distribution without
active seat ventilation
The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.
1.
Press button 1.
Seite 46
Controls Adjusting
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
2. "Seat heating distribution"
3. Turn the controller to adjust the distribu‐
tion.
The setting is applied.
Temperature distribution with active
seat ventilation
The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.
1.
Press button 1.
2. "Seat heating distribution"
3. Turn the controller to adjust the distribu‐
tion.
The setting is applied.
Heated rear seats
Operation similar to front seat heating, without
temperature distribution, refer to page 46.
Active seat
The seat cushion is actively varied by alter‐
nately raising and lowering the right and left
half of the seat cushion. This reduces muscu‐
lar tension and fatigue to help prevent lower
back pain.
Press the button to switch on; the LED lights
up.
The action of the system is reduced and if
need be, switched off in order to reduce the
load on the battery. The LED remains lit.
When the active seat is switched off, it can
take up to 1 minute before the two halves of
the seat cushion have returned to their initial
position.
Safety belts
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
Number of safety belts
Your vehicle has been fitted with four or five
safety belts for the safety of you and your pas‐
sengers:
Seite 47
Adjusting Controls
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Notes
One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or
small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies
low around the hips in the lap area and does
not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt
can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal
impact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck,
rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or
breakable objects, or be pinched.◀
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Using the middle safety belt
If the middle safety belt in the rear is
used, the larger section of the backrest must
be locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not
have a restraining effect.◀
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Unbuckling the belt
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every build
if the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to
page 44.
The two rear safety belt buckles integrated
into the rear seat are for passengers sitting on
the left and right. The belt buckle embossed
with the word CENTER is intended exclusively
for use by passengers riding in the center posi‐
tion.
Safety belt reminder for the driver's
and front passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a
signal sounds. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display.
Check whether the safety belt has been fas‐
tened correctly.
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Belt-force limiter
The effect of the belt-force limiter on the driv‐
er's seat is dependent on the position of the
driver's seat.
Seite 48
Controls Adjusting
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
To maintain the long-term accuracy of this
function, the driver's seat must be calibrated if
a corresponding message is displayed on the
Control Display.
Calibrating driver's seat
The warning lamp lights up. A mes‐
sage also appears on the Control Dis‐
play. Please calibrate the driver's
seat.
1. Move the driver's seat forward until it
stops.
2. Move the driver's seat forward again. It
briefly moves toward the front in the proc‐
ess.
3. Set the desired seating position again.
The calibration is completed when the mes‐
sage on the Control Display disappears.
Should this message continue to be displayed,
repeat the calibration. If the message does not
disappear even after repeated calibration, have
the system checked as soon as possible.
Do not carry out calibration while the ve‐
hicle is moving
Never carry out calibration while the vehicle is
moving, as this can cause accidents.
Make sure that no persons or objects become
wedged during the calibration process, as this
can cause injuries or damage.◀
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approx. at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Active front head restraints
In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient
severity, the active head restraint reduces the
distance to the head.
Reduced protective function
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint
covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraints.
▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW
to the seat or head restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
head restraint will be impaired and the per‐
sonal safety of the occupants will be endan‐
gered.
Have the active head restraints reset after they
are triggered in a rear-end collision. Have this
work performed by the service center only;
otherwise, this safety feature with not be op‐
erational.◀
Please contact the service center if the front
head restraints need to be removed or instal‐
led.
Front seats: adjusting the height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approx. at ear level.
Seite 49
Adjusting Controls
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Electric
Adjusting electrically.
Front seats: adjusting the distance
from the back of the head
Press the button and pull the headrest cushion
forward or push it back.
Compromised performance
Do not place any objects behind the
headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can impair
the proper function of the head restraint.◀
Comfort seat
The distance from the back of the seat occu‐
pant's head can be adjusted using the
shoulder support, refer to page 45.
Adjusting side extensions
You can fold the side extensions on the head
restraint forward for increased lateral support
in the resting position.
Rear seats
The head restraints in the rear cannot be ad‐
justed and cannot be removed.
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory
General information
Two different driver's seat and front passenger
seat positions, exterior mirror positions and
steering wheel positions can be stored and re‐
trieved.
The adjustment of the backrest width and the
lumbar support is not stored in the memory.
Seite 50
Controls Adjusting
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Storing
1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion, refer to page 59.
2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel positions.
3.
Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
The LED goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again. The LED goes
out.
Calling up settings
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while driv‐
ing, as an unexpected seat movement could
result in an accident.◀
Comfort function
1.
Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on the radio ready state, refer to
page 59.
2. Briefly press the desired memory but‐
ton 1 or 2.
The seat is automatically moved to the stored
position.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
Safety mode
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni‐
tion on or off, refer to page 59.
2. Press and hold the desired memory button
1 or 2 until the setting procedure is com‐
pleted.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's mirror.
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you
see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk
of an accident.◀
At a glance
1 Adjusting
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Seite 51
Adjusting Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
tion in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 50.
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the
curb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐
ing, for example.
Activating
1. Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Shift into reverse or engage transmission
position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out
Press button 3.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Depending on the external temperature, both
exterior mirrors are automatically heated when
the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
Interior rearview mirror
Reducing the blinding effect
From behind when driving at night: turn the
knob.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature
Two photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass, see arrow.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
For proper operation:
Seite 52
Controls Adjusting
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
General information
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
Mechanical
1.
Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back
up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam‐
aged.◀
Electric
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐
rections.
Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat,
mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to
page 50.
Easy entry/exit
To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel
temporarily moves into the uppermost posi‐
tion.
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 53
Adjusting Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
The right place for children
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is on the rear seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Transport children younger than
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm on
the rear seats only, using child restraint fixing
systems suitable for the age, weight, and
height of the child. Otherwise, there is the in‐
creased danger of injury in an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to
their age, weight and size.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child restraint
fixing system on the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front and side airbags on
the front passenger side are deactivated. Auto‐
matic deactivation of front passenger airbags,
refer to page 87.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀
Installing child restraint
fixing systems
Notes
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint fixing system
on the front passenger seat, ensure that the
front and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
Seite 54
Controls Transporting children safely
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
possible and adjust its height to the highest
position to obtain the best possible position for
the belt and to offer optimal protection in the
event of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height af‐
ter this.
Backrest width
Before mounting a child restraint fixing system
on the front passenger seat, open the backrest
width, refer to page 45, completely. Do not
change the backrest width after this.
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the back‐
rest width must be opened completely. Do not
change the adjustment after this; otherwise,
the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be locked to prevent ex‐
tension in order to permit attachment of child
restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system
with the belt.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Note
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint
fixing systems, observe the operating and
safety information from the system manufac‐
turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be
reduced.◀
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint
fixing system is resting snugly against the
backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection
offered may be reduced.◀
Seite 55
Transporting children safely Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
located at the points indicated by the arrows.
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
1.
Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐
fer to the operating instructions of the sys‐
tem.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
Mounting points
For child restraint fixing systems with tether
strap, there are additional mounting points on
the back of the rear seat backrests, see arrows.
LATCH mounting eyes
Only use the mounting eyes for the up‐
per LATCH retaining strap to secure child re‐
straint fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting
eyes could be damaged.◀
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as
it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the
strap will not properly secure the child restraint
fixing system in the event of an accident.◀
Outer rear seats
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Backrest
6 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐
ing system
When using the cargo cover, pass the upper
retaining strap between the rear seat backrest
and the cargo cover.
Seite 56
Controls Transporting children safely
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Center rear seat
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Strap guide
4 Hook for upper retaining strap
5 Mounting point
6 Backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐
ing system
When using the cargo cover, pass the upper
retaining strap between the rear seat backrest
and the cargo cover.
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the backrest of the rear seat row
1. Route the upper retaining strap over the
middle of the head restraint.
2. Attach the upper retaining strap to the
mounting point with the hook.
3. Pull the retaining strap taut until it com‐
presses the cushion of the head restraint,
thus preventing the strap from sliding off.
Locking the doors and
windows
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
Seite 57
Transporting children safely Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Driving
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Radio ready state is switched on. Individual
electrical consumers can operate.
Comfort Access
If the car is equipped with Comfort Access,
only insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, refer to page 37, under special circum‐
stances.
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control
out of the ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of
the ignition lock as this may cause damage.◀
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the
ignition on or off and starts the engine.
The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed
when you press the Start/Stop button.
Radio ready state
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the external temperature are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Radio ready state is switched off automatically:
▷ When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock.
▷ In cars with Comfort Access, refer to
page 37, by touching the surface above the
door lock.
Seite 59
Driving Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The od‐
ometer and trip odometer are displayed in the
instrument cluster.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Radio ready state and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis‐
plays in the instrument cluster go out.
Transmission position P with the ignition
off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition
is not switched off accidentally.◀
For example, the ignition is not switched off in
the following situations:
▷ The brake is applied.
▷ The low beams are switched on
Starting the engine
General information
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless but highly toxic
gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the car unattended with the
engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐
tial source of danger.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, set the parking brake and engage trans‐
mission position P; otherwise, the vehicle may
begin to roll.◀
Frequent starting in quick succession
Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting
the car and avoid starting the car frequently in
quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not
burned or is inadequately burned, and there is
the danger of overheating and damaging the
catalytic converter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Starting the engine
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 37.
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Engine stop
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the windows and injure
themselves.◀
Seite 60
Controls Driving
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐
hicle, for example, by turning the steering
wheel in the direction of the curb.◀
Before driving into a car wash
To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an
automatic car wash, follow the information on
Washing in automatic car washes, refer to
page 291.
Switching off the engine
Procedure
1.
Engage transmission position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐
tion lock, refer to page 59.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
The parking brake can be set manually or auto‐
matically:
▷ Manual: by pulling and pushing the switch.
▷ Automatic: by activating Automatic Hold.
Setting manually
Pull the button. The parking brake is set.
The indicator lamp lights up in red. The
parking brake is set.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
To set the parking brake, the remote control
does not need to be in the ignition lock.
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐
hicle, for example, by turning the steering
wheel in the direction of the curb.◀
While driving
Use while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the button is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up in red, a
signal sounds and the brake lamps light
up.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx.
2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.
Seite 61
Driving Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Releasing manually
Press the button with the brake depressed.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot release the parking brake.◀
Automatic Hold
The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving away.
For your safety
Automatic Hold is deactivated automatically
and the parking brake is set when:
▷ The engine is switched off.
▷ A door is opened and the driver's safety
belt is unbuckled.
▷ The vehicle is braked to a standstill with
the parking brake while driving.
The indicator lamp switches from
green to red and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
Before driving away:
▷ Release the parking brake manually.
▷ Reactivate Automatic Hold.
Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and ensure that the parking brake is
set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Activating
Press the button. The LED in the button lights
up and the indication AUTO H appears in the
instrument panel.
Automatic Hold is activated.
If the vehicle is being held by Auto‐
matic Hold, the indicator light in the in‐
strument panel also lights up in green.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
Deactivating
Press the button again, the LED in the button
and the indication AUTO H in the instrument
panel go out.
Seite 62
Controls Driving
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
then press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake is set manually, refer
to page 61, Automatic Hold is deactivated au‐
tomatically.
Driving
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is au‐
tomatically secured against rolling when it
stops.
The indicator lamp lights up in green.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Before driving into a car wash
Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise,
the parking brake will be set when the vehicle
is stationary and the vehicle will no longer be
able to roll.◀
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the
engine is switched off while the vehicle is be‐
ing held by Automatic Hold.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
The parking brake is not set if the engine is
switched off while the vehicle is coasting to a
halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot release the parking brake.◀
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing using a wheel chock, for example, when
leaving it.
Releasing the parking brake manually
In the event of an electrical power loss or elec‐
trical malfunction, you can release the parking
brake manually.
Secure the vehicle against rolling
Before releasing the parking brake man‐
ually, and whenever you park the vehicle with
the parking brake released, ensure that posi‐
tion P of the automatic transmission is en‐
gaged. Note the display in the instrument clus‐
ter.
In addition, secure the vehicle against rolling,
e.g. with a wheel chock. Otherwise there is a
danger that the vehicle could roll if parked on a
steep slope.◀
Jump-starting and towing, refer to page 289.
Unlocking
1.
Open the left-hand side panel in the cargo
area.
2. Remove the first aid kit and the warning tri‐
angle. Close the bracket of the warning tri‐
angle.
3. Insert the screwdriver, which is contained
in the onboard vehicle tool kit under the
Seite 63
Driving Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
cargo floor panel, refer to page 276, into
the loop of the release point, see arrow.
4. Forcefully pull the screwdriver up against
the mechanical resistance until there is a
marked increase in resistance and the
parking brake can be heard to unlock.
5. Stow the screwdriver, warning triangle, and
first aid kit and close the left side panel in
the cargo area.
Have the malfunction corrected
Have the malfunction corrected at the
nearest service center or at a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel. If the
parking brake has been released manually in
response to a malfunction, only technicians
can return it to operation.◀
Following manual release, the actual status of
the parking brake may deviate from that dis‐
played by the indicator lamp.
Putting into operation after a power
failure
Putting the parking brake into operation
The parking brake should only be put
into operation again if it was manually released
due to an interruption in the supply of electrical
power. Otherwise the operation of the parking
brake is not ensured and there is a danger of
the vehicle rolling despite the parking brake
being set.◀
Procedure
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the button with the brake depressed.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
Any noises which occur are normal. Startup
may take several seconds.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
At a glance
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signal
Turn signal
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Signaling a turn briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Seite 64
Controls Driving
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
This function can be activated or deactivated:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Washer/wiper system
Notes
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are
frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the
wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor
may be damaged.◀
Do not use the wipers on a dry wind‐
shield
Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield; oth‐
erwise, the wiper blades may wear more rap‐
idly or become damaged.◀
At a glance
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
4 Cleaning the windshield and headlamps
5 Setting the sensitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press up once.
The system switches to operation in the inter‐
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press up twice or press once beyond the re‐
sistance point.
The system switches to normal speed when
the vehicle is stationary.
Switching off wipers or brief wipe
Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Seite 65
Driving Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Rain sensor
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the
time between wipes is controlled automatically
and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield,
directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating the rain sensor
Press the button, arrow 3.
The LED in the steering wheel stalk lights up
and a wiping cycle is started.
At temperatures below 32 ℉/0 ℃, a wiping cy‐
cle is not started before driving away. Release
frozen wipers before driving away.
Rain sensor sensitivity
Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.
Deactivating the rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise,
damage could be caused by undesired wiper
activation.◀
Cleaning the windshield and
headlamps
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated au‐
tomatically while the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on.
Washer fluid
General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause
injuries if used improperly.
Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐
tion.
Only keep it in the closed original container
and inaccessible to children.
Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
tainer.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Con‐
centrate or the equivalent.◀
Seite 66
Controls Driving
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Washer fluid reservoir
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and
hot engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
The recommended minimum filling quantity is
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Fill with a mixture of window washing concen‐
trate and tap water; if needed, add antifreeze
according to the manufacturer instructions.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Do not fill in undiluted window washing con‐
centrate and antifreeze and do not fill in pure
water; this could damage the washer system.
Do not mix window washing concentrate from
different manufacturers; this could cause the
washer nozzles to clog.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are available.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐
sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐
sition D.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
The vehicle can roll.
N remains engaged after the engine is
switched off if the remote control remains in
the ignition lock. This function can be used in
an automatic car wash, refer to page 291, for
example. P is automatically engaged after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes.
P Park
The drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically when the following
conditions are met:
▷ The driver's door is opened while the en‐
gine is running, the safety belt is not fas‐
tened and neither the brake pedal nor the
accelerator is activated.
▷ The engine is switched off unless N is en‐
gaged and the remote control is in the igni‐
tion lock.
▷ The remote control is removed from the ig‐
nition lock.
Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the
transmission position P is engaged; otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to roll.
Engaging transmission position
▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the
brake pedal is pressed.
Seite 67
Driving Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Press on the brake pedal until you start
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a driving position, maintain pressure on
the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀
Engaging transmission positions D, R,
N
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
When shifting out of P or into R, simultane‐
ously push the unlock button 1.
The engaged transmission position is dis‐
played on the selector lever.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
its center position.
Engaging transmission position P
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Press button P.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
The Sport program is activated and DS or the
engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for example S4.
This position is recommended for a perform‐
ance-oriented driving style.
Activating manual mode
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
ward.
The transmission only shifts up or down if the
rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the
engine speed is too high, the transmission
does not shift down.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument panel, followed by the current gear.
Ending the Sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
Seite 68
Controls Driving
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shifting gears using the shift paddles
on the steering wheel
The shifting paddles make it possible to
quickly change gears since both hands can re‐
main on the steering wheel.
▷ If the shift paddles on the steering wheel
are used to shift gears while in automatic
mode D, the transmission temporarily
switches to manual mode.
▷ If the shift paddles are not used to acceler‐
ate or shift gears for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode D.
With the transmission position M/S selected,
the manual mode remains active.
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐
ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not
shift down if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission position is displayed and the
engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in
manual mode.
Seite 69
Driving Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Displays
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Odometer, external
temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Time, external temperature, and date
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument cluster
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
Press the knob for approx. 5 seconds:
View service requirement display, refer to
page 74
▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time,
external temperature and odometer are
displayed.
Units of measure
To set the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer and ℃ or ℉ for the ex‐
ternal temperature, refer to page 79.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Time, date, external temperature
From radio readiness the external temperature
and the time are displayed.
Set the time, refer to page 78.
Retrieving date
Press the button on turn signal lever upward;
the date appears.
Set the date, refer to page 78.
Pressing the button upward or downward sev‐
eral times changes the display between clock,
external temperature, date, and Check Control
messages, refer to page 76.
External temperature warning
If the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is
the increased danger of ice.
Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on
roads.
Seite 70
Controls Displays
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
If you still want to view the time, external tem‐
perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the igni‐
tion lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Tachometer
Never force the engine speed up into the red
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi‐
tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 273.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. You
can check whether you are currently driving in
an efficient and environmentally-friendly man‐
ner.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem‐
perature end. Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating temperature: the pointer
is in the middle or in the right half of the
temperature display.
Seite 71
Displays Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
perature end. Switch off the engine imme‐
diately and allow it to cool down.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Check the oil level, refer to page 271.
Fuel gauge
The vehicle inclination may cause the display
to vary.
Notes on refueling, refer to page 258.
Range
After the reserve range is reached:
▷ A message is briefly displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
▷ The remaining range is shown on the com‐
puter.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when corners are taken rapidly, engine
functions are not ensured.
The message appears continuously below a
range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
At the latest, refuel at a range below
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Computer
Displaying information on the
instrument panel
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
Information is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Overview of the information
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever displays the information on the in‐
strument cluster in the following order:
▷ Range.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
To set the corresponding units of measure, re‐
fer to page 79.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 18 miles/30 km.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle was parked and
the engine was switched off manually are not
included in the average speed calculations.
Seite 72
Controls Displays
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
With the trip computer, refer to page 73, you
can have the average speed displayed for an
additional distance.
To reset the average speed: press the button
on the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 sec‐
onds.
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period during which
the engine is running.
The average consumption is computed based
on the distance traveled since the last time the
computer was reset.
You can have the average consumption for an‐
other trip displayed, refer to Displays on the
Control Display below.
To reset the average consumption: press the
button on the turn indicator lever for ap‐
prox. 2 seconds.
Displays on the Control Display
Display the computer or trip computer on the
Control Display.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Displays on the "Onboard info":
▷ Range.
▷ Distance to destination.
▷ Estimated time of arrival if a destination
was entered in the navigation system, refer
to page 160.
Displays on the "Trip computer":
▷ Departure time.
▷ Trip duration.
▷ Trip distance.
Both displays show:
▷ Average fuel consumption and
▷ Average speed.
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
Resetting the values for average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1.
Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
Seite 73
Displays Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Resetting the trip computer
Resetting all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed
briefly immediately after you start the engine
or switch on the ignition.
The current service requirements can be read
out from the remote control by the service
specialist.
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the distance remaining or the due date for
that operation in the instrument cluster.
1.
With the ignition switched on, press the
knob in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 70, for approx. 5 seconds until the
service requirements are displayed.
2. Press the knob repeatedly to display the
individual service requirement items.
Displays
Symbol Function
Service requirements
Engine oil
Roadworthiness test
Front brake pads
Rear brake pads
Brake fluid
The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. First the data for the next maintenance
are displayed.
Seite 74
Controls Displays
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
Additional information can be displayed on
each entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently re‐
quired.
The deadline for service or a
legally mandated inspection is
approaching.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Make sure the date on the Control Display is
set correctly, refer to page 78.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
6. "Date:"
7. Create the settings.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjust‐
ment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the maintenance status or le‐
gally mandated inspections of the vehicle are
automatically transmitted to your service cen‐
ter before a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Seite 75
Displays Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys‐
tems monitored.
A Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
and, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal
and text messages at the top of the Control
Display.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
The symbol indicates that Check Control
messages have been stored. The Check Con‐
trol messages can be displayed later.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Con‐
trol Display in combination with a symbol in the
instrument cluster explain a Check Control
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
a fault or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Symbols
The following functions can be selected within
the supplementary text message, depending
on the Check Control message.
▷ "Service request"
Contact the service partner.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn signal lever up or
down.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
Seite 76
Controls Displays
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
They are stored and can be displayed
again later.
Viewing stored Check Control
messages
1. Press the button on the turn signal lever
downward. "CHECK OK" or the stored
Check Control messages appear on the
display.
„CHECK OK“ is shown if no messages are
present.
Check Control messages are accompanied
by text messages on the Control Display.
2. Press the button to display additional mes‐
sages, the time and external temperature,
or the date.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages that were displayed during a
trip are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
Speed limit
Entry of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a Check Control message to be
issued.
Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops
below the set speed limit once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as the
limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
Seite 77
Displays Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the time zone
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the date
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Seite 78
Controls Displays
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 26.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance, temperature, and pressure:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
Seite 79
Displays Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Seite 80
Controls Displays
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
At a glance
0 Lamps off and daytime running lights
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control, daytime run‐
ning lights, welcome lamps, adaptive light
control, and High-beam Assistant
Parking lamps/low beams,
headlamp control
General information
If the driver's door is opened while the ignition
is switched off, the exterior lighting is switched
off automatically in the following switch set‐
tings:
0, ,
Parking lamps
Switch position
: the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to
start the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 83.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating the welcome
lamps
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome light"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Seite 81
Lamps Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while after
the ignition is switched off, if the lamps are
switched off and the headlamp flasher is
switched on.
Setting the duration
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.: s"
4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Automatic headlamp control
Switch position : the low beams are
switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐
nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The
LED next to the symbol lights up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams remain switched on independ‐
ent of the ambient lighting conditions when
you switch on the front fog lamps.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐
ment in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually
under these conditions.◀
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights light up in posi‐
tion 0, and . After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lamps light up in po‐
sition .
Activating/deactivating
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
In sharp curves, e.g. serpentines, or during
turning, up to a certain speed one of the two
front fog lamps is switched on as a turning
lamp. This provides improved illumination of
the area inside the curve.
Seite 82
Controls Lamps
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Controls
Activating
Switch position
with the ignition switched
on.
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, both turning lamps
are active.
Malfunction
A message is displayed.
Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
High beams/roadside
parking lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
Left and right roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point for ap‐
prox. 2 seconds, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the battery.
Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly
long periods of time; otherwise, the battery
might not have enough power to start the en‐
gine.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
to the pressure point, arrow 3.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
When the lights are switched on, this system
automatically switches the high beams on and
off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on
the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as‐
sistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐
lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the High-beam Assistant
1.
Turn the light switch to .
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
push the turn indicator lever in the direc‐
tion of the high beam.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up. The high beams are
switched on and off automatically.
Seite 83
Lamps Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, briefly
push the turn indicator lever toward the high
beams.
Activating/deactivating via iDrive
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "High beam assistant"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve
as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐
ment of when to use the high beams. There‐
fore, manually switch off the high beams in sit‐
uations where this is required to avoid a safety
risk.◀
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
▷ If the sensor view field is dirty.
The view field of the sensor is located on
the front of the interior rearview mirror.
Do not cover this area with stickers, etc.
Clean the sensor view field with a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass
cleaner.
Front fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 82, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the fog
lamps.
Seite 84
Controls Lamps
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Instrument lighting
Adjust the brightness using the thumbwheel.
Interior lamps
General information
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, exit lamps,
cargo area lamps, and courtesy lamps are con‐
trolled automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside
the car are switched off about 8 minutes after
the ignition is switched off, Start/Stop button,
refer to page 59.
Switching the interior lamps on and
off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
To clear this setting: briefly press the button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lamps.
Danger of burns
Do not reach into the opening of the
lamps; otherwise, there is a risk of burns.◀
Seite 85
Lamps Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Safety
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Airbags
1 Front airbags
2 Head airbags
3 Side airbags
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
keep the danger of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not
cover with adhesive labels or coverings,
and do not attach holders such as for navi‐
gation instruments and mobile phones.
Seite 86
Controls Safety
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries
can occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
and the sides of the headliner.◀
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered;
otherwise, there is the danger of burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
your service center or a workshop that has the
necessary authorization for handling explo‐
sives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
undesired triggering of the airbag, either of
which could result in injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The occupation of the seat is detected by eval‐
uating the impression on the occupied seat
surface of the front passenger seat.
The front and side airbags on the front passen‐
ger side are activated or deactivated accord‐
ingly by the system.
The indicator lamp above the interior rearview
mirror shows the current status of the front
passenger airbags, deactivated or activated,
refer to Front passenger airbag indicator lamp
below.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,
the front passenger airbags may not function
properly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions under Children on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to page 54.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front passenger airbags may be deacti‐
vated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
Seite 87
Safety Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that occupation of the seat
cushion can be detected correctly:
▷ Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion
padding, ball mats or other items to the
passenger seat unless they are specifically
recommended by BMW.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
Indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the ar‐
rangement of the switches and indicator lamps
may differ somewhat.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
tivated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a child restraint fixing system intended for
the purpose is properly detected on the
seat. The airbags on the front passenger
side are not activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty. However, the airbags on
the front passenger side are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the system,
Especially the child seats required by NHTSA
at the time that the vehicle was manufactured.
After installing a child seat, make sure that the
indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags
lights up. This indicates that the child seat has
been detected and the front passenger airbags
are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag
system
When the ignition is switched on,, refer to
page 60, the warning lamp comes on briefly to
indicate that the entire airbag system and the
belt tensioners are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
▷ The warning lamp does not light up after
the ignition is switched on.
▷ Warning lamp remains permanently on.
Have the airbag system checked without
delay if there is a malfunction
In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys‐
tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise,
there is the risk that the system will not func‐
tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe
accident occurs.◀
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Seite 88
Controls Safety
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing
the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter
and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire
inflation pressure regularly.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive
wheels, high lateral acceleration.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
When driving with a compact wheel, the Flat
Tire Monitor is unable to function.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set infla‐
tion tire pressures as reference values for the
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
confirming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains or with a compact wheel.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization with "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up red. A
message appears on the Control Dis‐
play. In addition, a signal sounds.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation
pressure.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires
as provided at the factory, do not continue
driving. Continuing to drive could cause severe
accidents.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
Seite 89
Safety Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If the defective tire continues to lose pres‐
sure, its position will be indicated to you on
the Control Display.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is ap‐
prox. 50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
properties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The tire inflation pressure is measured in the
four mounted tires. The system notifies you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset while the in‐
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable
signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
The system does not operate correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
Seite 90
Controls Safety
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
indicated despite correct tire inflation pres‐
sures.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a
flat tire:
▷ If a wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted, e.g., compact wheel.
▷ When the TPM is disturbed by other sys‐
tems or devices with the same radio fre‐
quency.
Status display
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "TPM"
The status is displayed.
Status indicator on the Control
Display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
driving is taken into account.
A correction is only necessary if this is indi‐
cated by the TPM
Wheels, green
The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target
state.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
▷ A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure
in several tires.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues a warning based
on the inflation pressures initialized last.
▷ A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys‐
tem is being reset.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this may be:
▷ TPM is being reset.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with
the same radio frequency.
▷ Malfunction.
Resetting the system
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving for a few minutes, the set tire in‐
flation pressures are applied as set values. The
resetting process is completed automatically
as you drive. The tires are shown in green and
"TPM active" is shown on the Control Display.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the process resumes auto‐
matically. Do not reset the system when driv‐
ing with a compact wheel.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is re‐
setting, all tires on the Control Display are dis‐
played in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is
shown.
Low tire pressure message
The small warning lamp lights up yel‐
low and the large warning lamp lights
up red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds.
Seite 91
Safety Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
flation pressure.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues warnings based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires
as provided at the factory, do not continue
driving. Continuing to drive could cause severe
accidents.◀
When a low inflation pressure is indicated,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
if necessary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. Reset the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is ap‐
prox. 50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
properties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
Message when the system was not
reset
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
message appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
The system detected a wheel change but was
not reset.
Warnings regarding the current tire inflation
pressure are not reliable.
Seite 92
Controls Safety
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system.
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continu‐
ously; the larger warning lamp comes
on in yellow. On the Control Display,
the tires are shown in gray and a message ap‐
pears. No flat tire can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ If a wheel without TPM electronics is fitted,
for instance a compact wheel: have the
service center check it if necessary.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
▷ TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the
system again.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with
the same radio frequency: after leaving the
area of the disturbance, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv‐
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres‐
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the mal‐
function indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the in‐
stallation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en‐
sure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Lane departure warning
The concept
This system issues a warning at speeds above
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h if the vehicle is about
to leave the lane on roads with lane markings.
The steering wheel begins vibrating lightly.
The time when the warning is issued may vary
with the current driving situation.
The system does not issue a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Seite 93
Safety Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Switching on/off
Press button 1 on the steering wheel.
▷ On: lane markings 2 are lit.
▷ Off: lane markings 2 go out.
The system can issue warnings at speeds
above approx. 40 mph/65 km/h.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
1 The system is activated.
2 Arrows: at least one lane marking was de‐
tected and warnings can be issued.
Issuing a warning
If the vehicle begins leaving the lane and a lane
marking has been detected, the steering wheel
begins vibrating.
If the turn signal is set before the lane is
changed, a warning is not issued.
Canceling a warning
The warning is canceled:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ After the vehicle returns to its lane.
▷ During heavy brake application.
▷ When the turn signal flashes.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the
course of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐
ing wheel; otherwise, you may lose control
over the vehicle.◀
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merg‐
ing, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield is fogged over, dirty
or covered by a sticker, etc., in front of the
interior rearview mirror.
Malfunctions
Steering wheel vibration
Frequent activation of the steering wheel vi‐
bration causes the system to overheat.
The lane departure warning system is deacti‐
vated.
Let the system cool and reactivate it by press‐
ing the button.
Seite 94
Controls Safety
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Camera
The camera is located on the front of the inte‐
rior Rear View mirror.
Keep the area in front of the interior rearview
mirror clear.
Brake force display
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
Seite 95
Safety Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full
brake applications, thus increasing active
safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
CBC Cornering Brake
Control
When braking during curves or when braking
during a lane change, driving stability and
steering response are improved further.
Electronic brake-force
distribution
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the short‐
est possible braking distance during full brak‐
ing. This system utilizes all of the benefits pro‐
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving
wheels when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub‐
ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the
vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine
speed and by applying brakes to the individual
wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Do not reduce the additional safety margin
with a risky driving style, as otherwise there is
a risk of an accident.◀
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in bends.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Seite 96
Controls Driving stability control systems
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold the button, but not longer than
approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for
DSC lights up in the instrument cluster and
DSC OFF is displayed. DTC Dynamic Traction
Control and DSC are deactivated together.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Please note any supplementary information
that appears there.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster go out.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC has failed.
DSC deactivated:
The indicator lamp lights up and
DSC OFF appears in the instrument
cluster.
DSC and DTC deactivated.
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in
which forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward mo‐
mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐
lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐
ited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in
slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road
surfaces
▷ When rocking a vehicle free or starting off
in deep snow, sand, or on loose ground
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Seite 97
Driving stability control systems Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Activating DTC
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights
up.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the indicator lamp in the in‐
strument cluster go out.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes: DTC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC has failed.
DTC activated:
The indicator lamp lights up and
TRACTION appears in the instrument
cluster.
DTC is activated.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC
further optimize the traction and dynamic driv‐
ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system
xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to
the front and rear axle depending on the driv‐
ing situation and prevailing road conditions.
Dynamic Performance
Control
The concept
Dynamic Performance Control optimizes the
handling characteristics of your vehicle when
starting off, cornering, and during evasive ma‐
neuvers.
To achieve this, the system variably distributes
the drive torque of the rear axle to the two rear
wheels. This further increases the steering
precision and tracking stability of your vehicle.
Display
The Control Display shows how xDrive and Dy‐
namic Performance Control are distributing the
drive forces.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Torque distribution"
The current distribution of drive forces is indi‐
cated by arrows pointing to all four wheels.
The highlighted arrows show the drive forces
currently present. The longer an arrow is, the
Seite 98
Controls Driving stability control systems
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
greater the drive forces in the associated
wheel.
The transparent arrows indicate the maximum
value the drive forces over the last 10 seconds.
Malfunction
Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control,
refer to page 76.
Hill Descent Control HDC
The concept
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
matically controls vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients. The vehicle moves at ap‐
proximately walking speed without braking in‐
tervention by the driver.
You can activate the Hill Descent Control at
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
moving downhill at speeds below approx.
22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces its speed
to approximately walking speed, approx.
5 mph/8 km/h and keeps it constant.
Only use HDC in transmission positions D or R.
Increasing or reducing speed
The speed can be changed in the range from
approx. 4 mph/6 km/h to ap‐
prox. 15 mph/25 km/h by pressing the acceler‐
ator or brake pedal lightly.
A target speed within the same range can be
specified using the lever of the cruise control.
On inclines over 10 %, you can reduce the
speed to approx. 3 mph/4 km/h. Pull the lever
of the cruise control beyond the resistance
point, arrow 3.
1 Increasing speed
2 Pull to the resistance point: reduce the
speed to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h
3 Pull beyond the resistance point: on in‐
clines over 10 %, reduce the speed to ap‐
prox. 3 mph/4 km/h
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED above the button
lights up.
The LED flashes when the brakes are applied
automatically.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
HDC is automatically deactivated above ap‐
prox. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Seite 99
Driving stability control systems Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Display for target speed
2 HDC display
Malfunction
HDC is temporarily unavailable in the following
situations due to a high brake temperature:
▷ The LED in the button and the display HDC
go out during HDC operation.
▷ The LED in the button and the HDC display
do not light up when the button is pressed.
Malfunction of driving
stability control systems
Adapting your driving style
When driving on poor roads, avoid using
full throttle or pressing the accelerator beyond
the kickdown point and also avoid heavy brak‐
ing. Otherwise, the drive train may be damaged
or accidents can occur.◀
Adaptive Drive
The concept
Adaptive Drive reduces the body roll which oc‐
curs when cornering quickly or during fast eva‐
sive maneuvers. In addition, Adaptive Drive re‐
duces the steering angle requirement,
improves the running comfort, and enhances
the dynamic driving characteristics of your ve‐
hicle.
Chassis and suspension tuning
Two chassis and suspension tunings are avail‐
able for selection.
▷ Normal:
The comfortable basic setting offers opti‐
mum comfort when traveling.
▷ Sport:
The sporty basic setting offers increased
driving agility.
Selecting chassis and suspension
tuning
Press the button.
The system switches between the two chassis
and suspension tuning settings.
▷ Sport:
The LED in the button lights up and
SPORT is displayed in the instrument
panel.
▷ Normal:
The LED in the button goes out.
The selection of the chassis and suspension
tuning setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradi‐
ents. The parking brake is not required.
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
Seite 100
Controls Driving stability control systems
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
2. Release the foot brake and drive away
without delay.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin
rolling back.◀
Self-leveling suspension
The concept
The self-leveling suspension on the rear axle
assures a continuous ground clearance.
To do so, the height of the vehicle is measured
by sensors at both rear wheels.
If the actual height deviates from the defined
height, such as due to cargo in the vehicle, this
difference is compensated very quickly. In ad‐
dition, spring motions resulting from cornering
or irregularities in the road surface are reduced
to a minimum.
The system works automatically.
Malfunctions
Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control,
refer to page 76.
Active steering
The concept
The active steering actively varies the steering
angle of the front wheels in relation to the
steering wheel movements. In addition, it also
varies the steering force required for steering
depending on the vehicle's speed.
When you are driving in the low speed range,
for instance in a town or when parking, the
steering angle increases, i.e., steering be‐
comes very direct. In the higher speed range,
on the other hand, the steering angle is re‐
duced more and more. This improves the han‐
dling of your vehicle over the entire speed
range.
In critical situations, the system can make tar‐
geted corrections to the steering angle pro‐
vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehi‐
cle before the driver intervenes.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up yellow
and a message is shown on the Con‐
trol Display. The active steering is de‐
fective or has been temporarily deac‐
tivated. At low speeds, greater steering wheel
movements are required, whereas at higher
speeds, the vehicle reacts more sensitively to
steering wheel movements. The stability-pro‐
moting intervention can also be deactivated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Deactivation
Active steering deactivates in order to carry
out an initialization. This deactivation is dis‐
played by means of a message. The initializa‐
tion can take several minutes.
If the message does not disappear during the
current trip, have the system checked.
Defect
In the event of a defect, a corresponding text
message is displayed. Have the system
checked.
Seite 101
Driving stability control systems Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Active cruise control
With active cruise control you can select a de‐
sired speed which is then automatically main‐
tained when driving on open roadways and is
varied to maintain a selected distance setting
to slower moving vehicles ahead.
Active cruise control represents a technologi‐
cal advance over the familiar cruise control and
is a welcome relief from the constant adjust‐
ment of speed that can accompany driving in
traffic on highways or other high-speed thor‐
oughfares. Especially on longer trips and in
traffic congestion, the system can reduce fati‐
gue and tension, while increasing your enjoy‐
ment of driving. Please use it safely and re‐
sponsibly.
In addition to holding a steady cruising speed,
if you encounter slower vehicles ahead, active
cruise control will, within limits, adjust your ve‐
hicle's speed automatically so that you can
flow with the traffic without having to make
constant adjustments. If, for example, while
cruising at the selected speed, you begin to
approach a slower vehicle ahead of you in the
same lane, the system will reduce your vehi‐
cle's speed to the same as that of the vehicle
ahead to maintain your selected distance set‐
ting. You can vary the following distance,
which will vary with speed. Based on your se‐
lected distance setting, the system automati‐
cally decreases the throttle setting and lightly
applies the brakes if necessary. In addition, if
the vehicle ahead of you slows to a complete
stop, the system can follow this action within
the given scope and can also accelerate from a
complete stop if the vehicle ahead of you
drives off again shortly thereafter. During brak‐
ing, your vehicle brake lamps will automatically
illuminate to alert a following driver to take ac‐
tion. In addition, it may be necessary for your
vehicle to downshift the automatic transmis‐
sion to maintain the distance setting selected.
As soon as the road in front of you has no mov‐
ing vehicles, the system will accelerate to your
desired speed. This set speed is also main‐
tained on downhill grades, however the vehicle
speed can drop below the set speed when
driving uphill if the engine output is not suffi‐
cient.
Personal responsibility
Active cruise control cannot detect stop
signs, red lights, or any object that is stopped
or is blocking the road. Active cruise control is
not and must not be used as a collision avoid‐
ance/warning system. Since this active cruise
control system is a new technology and oper‐
ates differently from conventional cruise con‐
trol systems to which you may be accustomed,
it is necessary that you read all of the pages re‐
lating to this system before use. Carefully read
and observe the information on the system
limitations, refer to page 107, to obtain a good
command of the system and its range of appli‐
cations.◀
Brake pedal feel
When the system brakes and you also depress
the brake pedal, a somewhat different braking
feel results.
Seite 102
Controls Driving comfort
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Professional navigation system
If the vehicle is equipped with a Professional
navigation system, the system adapts the ac‐
celeration and deceleration behavior of the ve‐
hicle to the road on which you are currently
driving.
To ensure that the system has the latest infor‐
mation on the course of the road, use the most
recent version of the navigation data.
If the vehicle position is unknown, e.g., if you
have left the region covered by the map, the
navigation system ceases to influence vehicle
behavior.
Applications
Please try the system first during sparse traffic
and clear road conditions so that you can get
used to the system. After you have experience
and understand the system, only then use it
during normal traffic.
As with conventional cruise control systems,
active cruise control in no way reduces or sub‐
stitutes for the driver's own personal experi‐
ence, responsibility, alertness and awareness
in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise con‐
trolling the vehicle. The driver should decide
when to use the system on the basis of road,
traffic, visibility, and weather conditions. Active
cruise control is intended for use on highway-
type roadways where traffic is moving rela‐
tively smoothly as well as in slow-moving traf‐
fic congestion. Do not use the system in city
driving; in complex driving situations; heavy
traffic such as during rush hour; on curvy,
winding roads, slippery roads or roads with
sharp curves such as highway off-ramps; dur‐
ing inclement weather such as snow, strong
rain or fog; or when entering interchanges,
service/parking areas or toll booths. It is also
important to regulate your vehicle's speed and
distance setting within applicable legal limits.
Always be ready to take action or apply the
brakes if necessary, especially when the sys‐
tem is actively following a vehicle in front of
you. Otherwise, driving conditions can result
which lead to a violation of the law or elevated
risk of an accident.
The minimum initial activation speed is
20 mph/ 30 km/h, and the maximum speed is
110 mph/ 180 km/h. The system can also be
activated while the vehicle is stationary, refer
to page 105.
One lever for all functions
1 Storing and increasing the desired
speed 103
2 Storing and reducing the desired
speed 103
3 Interrupting 105 or deactivating 105 the
system
4 Retrieving the stored desired speed and
distance 105 or driving away 105
5 Selecting the distance to the vehicle
ahead 104
Storing the current speed
Push the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, ar‐
row 2.
Seite 103
Driving comfort Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
The system stores the current vehicle speed. It
is indicated on the speedometer and briefly in
the instrument panel.
Increasing desired speed
Press or briefly push the lever up to or beyond
the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is displayed.
The displayed speed is stored and the vehicle
reaches the stored speed if the road is clear.
▷ With each activation to the resistance
point, the desired speed increases by ap‐
prox. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ With each activation beyond the resistance
point, the desired speed increases by a
maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Reducing the desired speed
Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed
is displayed.
The functions are the same as those when in‐
creasing the desired speed.
Selecting the distance
▷ Press the rocker down briefly:
Increase the distance.
▷ Press the rocker up briefly:
Decrease the distance.
The selected distance is displayed in the in‐
strument panel.
Distance display
Distance 1, closest
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4, furthest
This distance is set when you
activate the system.
Selecting an appropriate distance
Use good judgement to select the appro‐
priate following distance given road conditions,
traffic, applicable laws and State driving rec‐
ommendations for safe following distance.
Otherwise, a violation of the law or risk of an
accident could result.◀
Seite 104
Controls Driving comfort
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Interrupting the system
Press the lever up or down and additionally de‐
press the brake if the vehicle is stationary. The
mark in the speedometer changes color and
the distance indicator goes out.
In addition, the system is interrupted:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ When the transmission position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC is activated
▷ When the safety belt and the driver's door
are opened while the vehicle is stationary.
▷ When the system has not detected objects
for an extended period, e.g., on a road with
very little traffic without road edge line
markings.
▷ The radar sensor is dirty.
Active intervention if the system is inter‐
rupted
If the system is interrupted, actively intervene
by braking and, if necessary, with evasive ma‐
neuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an
accident occurring.◀
Calling up the stored desired speed
and distance
While driving
Press button 4, refer to page 103. All of the
displays in the instrument panel lights up.
While standing
Before leaving the vehicle
Before leaving the vehicle with the en‐
gine running, engage position P of the auto‐
matic transmission and apply the parking
brake. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to
roll.◀
If a vehicle detected ahead of you slows to a
halt and your vehicle is also brought to a halt
by the system:
▷ If the vehicle ahead of you drives away,
your vehicle accelerates automatically as
long as mark 1 for the desired speed in the
speedometer is green.
▷ If the vehicle ahead of you drives away
when mark 1 is orange, depress the accel‐
erator briefly or press button 4.Rolling bars
in the distance indicator 3 mean that the
vehicle ahead of you has driven away.
If you are standing behind a vehicle with your
brake pedal depressed and the system is de‐
activated or interrupted:
1.
Select the desired speed using the lever,
arrow 1 or arrow 2, or press button 4 to re‐
trieve a stored speed.
2. Release the brake pedal.
3. When the vehicle ahead of you drives
away, press on the accelerator briefly or
press button 4.
Deactivating the system
▷ When driving, press the lever up or down
twice.
▷ When stationary, do the same while de‐
pressing the brake pedal.
▷ Switch off the ignition.
The displays go out, and the stored desired
speed and distance are deleted.
Seite 105
Driving comfort Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Displays in instrument cluster
1 Stored desired speed
▷ Green: the system is active.
▷ Orange: the system is interrupted.
2 Lights up yellow: vehicle detected ahead
Display also used for warnings, please read
all information on warnings.
3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead The in‐
dicator lights up as soon as the system is
activated.
The indicator lights up as soon as the sys‐
tem is activated.
The bars roll: the vehicle in front of you has
driven off
4 Brief display of stored desired speed
If the display --- mph/---km/h appears briefly,
the conditions necessary for operation may
currently not be met.
Warning lamps
Display 2 flashes red and a signal
sounds.
The system requests that the you
intervene by braking and carrying
out evasive maneuvers, if necessary. The sys‐
tem cannot independently restore the distance
to the vehicle ahead.
This display does not relieve the driver of the
responsibility to adapt his or her desired driv‐
ing speed and style to the traffic conditions.
Display 2 flashes yellow.
The conditions necessary for op‐
eration of the system are no lon‐
ger met, e.g., due to ABS or DSC
intervention. The system applies the brakes
until you actively assume control.
Radar sensor
Position
The radar sensor is integrated in the bumper.
Dirty or covered sensor
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐
tection of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully.
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar
sensor.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. Misalignment
may be caused by damage incurred during
parking, for example.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ OAYARS3-A
Seite 106
Controls Driving comfort
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
System limits
Speed range
Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The desired speed can be selected between
20 mph/30 km/h and 110 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐
uation when using the system.
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited. Two-
wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you for in‐
stance might not be detected.
Limited detection capacity
Because of the limits to the detection ca‐
pacity, you should be alert at all times so that
you can intervene actively, if necessary; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
ring.◀
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane,
e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end
of traffic congestion.
The system also does not respond to:
▷ Pedestrians or similarly slow road users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ Cross traffic.
▷ Approaching traffic.
No warnings
A warning may not be issued when ap‐
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
stacle. Take action yourself, otherwise there is
a risk of an accident.◀
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
Seite 107
Driving comfort Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
vers, if necessary. Take action yourself, other‐
wise there is a risk of an accident.◀
Unexpected lane change
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐
cle, you yourself must react, as the system
does not react to stopped vehicles.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although
curves cannot be anticipated in advance.
Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate
speed.
In tight curves, situations may result due to the
restricted detection range of the system in
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not
be detected at all, or not until after a consider‐
able delay.
When approaching a curve, the system may
react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of
the vehicle by the system can be compensated
for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator
pedal is released, the system becomes active
again and independently controls the speed.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines, with
a heavy trailer or behind bumps in the road.
Driver interventions and your
responsibility
Your actions have priority at all times. When
you press on the accelerator pedal while driv‐
ing, automatic braking is not performed and
the bars in the distance display go out until you
lift your foot from the accelerator pedal. Once
you release the accelerator pedal, the desired
speed is achieved again on clear roads or the
selected distance to the vehicle ahead is main‐
tained.
Making braking possible
Anytime the driver presses down on the
accelerator pedal, any braking action by the
system is interrupted and the distance indica‐
tor goes out until the pedal is fully released. As
soon as you fully release the accelerator, the
system will again control your cruising speed
and distance setting. While driving with the
Seite 108
Controls Driving comfort
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
system activated, resting your foot on the acel‐
erator pedal will cause the system not to brake
even if necessary. Be certain that floormats or
other objects on the vehicle floor do not inter‐
fere with movement of the acccelerator
pedal.◀
Limits of automatic braking
While active cruise control is capable of
braking your vehicle automatically when you
approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is impor‐
tant to be aware that the ability of the system
to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g. when
you reduce your desired speed sharply. lt uses
only a portion of braking system capacity and
does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle
braking system. Therefore, the system cannot
decrease your speed for large differences in
speed between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Examples: when you approach a vehicle
traveling at a much lower speed than your own
speed such as approaching a toll booth or
when a much slower vehicle cuts in front of
you at close range.◀
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning
at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
The speed specified using the lever on the
steering column is maintained.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
Do not use cruise control
Do not use the system if unfavorable
conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐
stant speed, for instance:
▷ On curvy roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐
cle and cause an accident.◀
One lever for all functions
1 Storing and maintaining speed or acceler‐
ating
2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler‐
ating
3 Interrupting and deactivating the system
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Maintaining current speed
Push, arrow 1, or pull, arrow 2, the lever to the
resistance point.
The car's current speed is stored and main‐
tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
briefly in the instrument cluster.
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
maintain the set speed if current engine power
output is insufficient. If the engine braking ef‐
fect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the sys‐
tem will brake the vehicle slightly.
Increasing desired speed
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is reached.
▷ Each time the lever is pressed to the point
of resistance, the desired speed increases
by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is in‐
creased by up to 5 mph/10 km/h.
Seite 109
Driving comfort Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Accelerating using the lever
Accelerating slightly:
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1,
until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerating significantly:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and
maintains the speed.
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired
speed is displayed.
▷ Each time the lever is pulled to the resist‐
ance point, the desired speed is decreased
by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is re‐
duced by up to 5 mph/10 km/h until the
minimum speed of 20 mph/30 km/h is ach‐
ieved.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Interrupting the system
Press the lever up or down, arrow 3: dis‐
play 1 in the speedometer changes color, refer
to page 110.
In addition, the system is interrupted:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ When the transmission position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC or ABS is intervening.
Warning lamp
The warning lamp lights up if cruise
control has been deactivated auto‐
matically, e.g., by a control intervention of the
DSC. A message appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
Resuming cruising speed
Press button 4:
The stored speed is resumed and maintained.
Deactivating the system
▷ Press the lever upward or downward twice,
arrow 3.
▷ Switch off the ignition.
The stored speed is cleared.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored desired speed
▷ Green: the system is active.
▷ Orange: the system is interrupted.
2 Selected desired speed appears briefly
If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears
briefly, conditions may not be adequate to op‐
erate the system.
Call up Check Control messages, refer to
page 77.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. The sys‐
tem is malfunctioning or has failed.
A message appears on the Control
Display. More information, refer to page 76.
Seite 110
Controls Driving comfort
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Park Distance Control PDC
The concept
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control,
the backup camera, refer to page 113, can be
switched on.
PDC supports you when parking. A slow ap‐
proach to an object in front of or behind your
vehicle is announced by:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
Measurement
Measurements are made by ultrasound sen‐
sors in the bumpers.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
▷ By the front sensors and two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects
located outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi‐
cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's
signal tone.◀
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
active.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, for in‐
stance:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With low objects.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may
not be detected.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition
switched on, shift the selector lever into posi‐
tion R.
Switching off automatically when
driving forward
The system switches off when a certain dis‐
tance or speed is exceeded.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Seite 111
Driving comfort Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of
the object. For example, if an object is de‐
tected behind the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
from the rear speakers.
The shorter the distance to the object be‐
comes, the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and be‐
hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig‐
nal is sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after ap‐
prox. 3 seconds:
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
sors.
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume
You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,
refer to page 181.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Visual warning
The approach to an object can be shown on
the Control Display. Objects that are farther
away are displayed on the Control Display be‐
fore a signal tone sounds.
The display appears as soon as PDC is acti‐
vated.
If the last image selected was the rearview
camera, this is displayed again. To switch to
PDC:
"Switch off rear view camera"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The image of the rear view camera is dis‐
played. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Seite 112
Controls Driving comfort
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Malfunction
A Check Control message, refer to page 76, is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
The areas in front of and behind the vehicle ap‐
pear in shaded form on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Surround View
The concept
Surround View encompasses the following
systems:
▷ Backup camera, refer to page 113.
▷ Top View, refer to page 115.
▷ Side View, refer to page 117.
It provides assistance when parking and ma‐
neuvering and at blind driveways and intersec‐
tions.
Rear view camera
The concept
The rear view camera assists you when park‐
ing and maneuvering in reverse. To accom‐
plish this, the region behind your vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
cated outside the picture area of the backup
camera.◀
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detected by the backup camera.◀
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition
switched on, shift the selector lever into posi‐
tion R.
The image of the rear view camera is displayed
when the system has been switched on using
iDrive.
Switching off automatically when
driving forward
The system switches off when a certain dis‐
tance or speed is exceeded.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
If PDC is displayed, switch on the backup cam‐
era via the iDrive, refer to page 112.
Seite 113
Driving comfort Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Assistance functions
Functional requirement
▷ Rear view camera is switched on.
▷ Tailgate is completely closed.
Pathway lines
▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear
view camera when the transmission is in
reverse.
▷ Help estimate the required amount of
space when parking and maneuvering on a
flat road surface.
▷ Depend on the current steering angle and
are continuously adapted to movements of
the steering wheel.
Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer
to page 115.
Turning lines
▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear
view camera.
▷ Show the path of the smallest turning cir‐
cle on a flat road surface.
▷ When the steering wheel is turned, only
one turning line is displayed.
Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer
to page 115.
Parking using pathway and turning
lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning
lines lead into the margins of the parking
space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Seite 114
Controls Driving comfort
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Obstacle marking
▷ Three-dimensionally shaped markings can
be displayed in the image of the rear view
camera.
Their color gradation corresponds to the mark‐
ings in PDC. This helps estimate the distance
to the object pictured.
Show the obstacle marking via the iDrive, refer
to page 115.
Activating assistance functions
Several assistance functions can be active at
the same time.
Showing the parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning lines are displayed.
Showing the obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Three-dimensionally-shaped markings are dis‐
played.
Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The image of the rear view camera is dis‐
played. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Brightness
With the rear view camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rear view camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Camera
The lens of the rearview camera is under the
grasping lip of the tailgate.
The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.
Top View
The concept
Top View assists you when parking and ma‐
neuvering. To accomplish this, the door region
and road surface region are shown on the Con‐
trol Display.
Detection
Detection is carried out by two cameras
integrated into the exterior mirror and the rear
view camera.
The range is:
Seite 115
Driving comfort Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Approx. 7 ft/2 m to the side.
▷ Approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear.
Obstacles up to the height of the exterior mir‐
rors are thus detected in a timely fashion.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
The arrows next to the vehicle are displayed in
a shaded form on the Control Display and a
symbol appears at the corresponding location
on the vehicle.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
cated outside the picture area of the
cameras.◀
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The images from Top View and PDC are dis‐
played when the system has been switched on
using iDrive.
Switching off automatically when
driving forward
The system switches off when a certain dis‐
tance or speed is exceeded.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup
camera via the iDrive, refer to page 115.
Visual warning
The approach to an object can be shown on
the Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, the
PDC display correspondingly shows a red bar
in front of the vehicle.
The display appears as soon as Top View is
activated.
If the last image selected was the rearview
camera, this is displayed again. To switch to
Top View:
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Seite 116
Controls Driving comfort
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With Top View activated:
"Rear view camera"
The image of the rear view camera is dis‐
played. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1.
"Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Displaying turning lines and pathway
lines
▷ The static, red turning line shows the lat‐
eral space required when the wheel is fully
turned.
▷ The variable, green pathway lines assist
you in estimating the amount of lateral
space actually required.
The pathway lines depend on the current
steering angle and are continuously
adapted to movements of the steering
wheel.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning lines and pathway lines are displayed.
Cameras
The lenses of the Top View cameras are on the
undersides of the exterior mirror housings.
The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.
Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected from
the driver's seat at the last minute. To improve
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐
cle record the traffic situation on each side.
System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.
Display
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could
result from road users or objects located out‐
side the picture area of the Side View cam‐
eras.◀
Seite 117
Driving comfort Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Switching off automatically when
driving forward
The system switches off when a certain dis‐
tance or speed is exceeded.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Image on the Control Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show
the position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1. "Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Cameras
The two camera lenses are located on the
sides of the bumper.
The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Clean the lens, refer to page 294.
Head-up Display
The concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e.g., navigation
instructions.
In this way, the driver can get information with‐
out averting his or her eyes from the road.
Seite 118
Controls Driving comfort
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.
Display
1 Navigation instructions
2 Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go func‐
tion
3 Lane departure warning
4 Cruise control/desired speed
5 Current speed
The Check Control messages are displayed
briefly if needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
Seite 119
Driving comfort Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted.
With the low beams switched on, the bright‐
ness can also be adjusted with the thumb‐
wheel of the instrument lighting.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Height adjustment
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
The height is adjusted.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield re‐
placed by a service center only.
Seite 120
Controls Driving comfort
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Climate
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
At a glance
1 Air toward the windshield and side win‐
dows
2 Air for the upper body
3 Air to footwell
4 Automatic climate control with 2-zone con‐
trol 122
Seite 121
Climate Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Automatic climate control with 4-zone con‐
trol 126
Automatic climate control with 2-zone control
1 Seat heating and ventilation, driver's
side 46
2 Temperature, left side of passenger com‐
partment
3 AUTO program
4 Temperature, right side of passenger com‐
partment
5 Maximum cooling
6 Seat heating and ventilation, front passen‐
ger side 46
7 Passenger side
▷ Manual air distribution
▷ Accessing setting for ventilation tem‐
perature on the Control Display
8 Switching cooling function on/off manually
9 Automatic recirculated air control/recircu‐
lated air mode
10 Manual air volume, switching off automatic
climate control, residual heat
11 Rear window defroster
12 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
13 Air grill for interior temperature sensor,
please keep clear and unobstructed
14 Driver's side
▷ Manual air distribution
▷ Accessing setting for ventilation tem‐
perature on the Control Display
The current setting for manual air distribution
is displayed on the Control Display.
Comfortable interior climate
The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis‐
tribution and air volume for virtually all condi‐
tions, refer to AUTO program below. Select a
comfortable interior temperature only.
The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most of these settings are stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use, Personal Profile
settings, refer to page 31.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and
temperature are controlled auto‐
matically.
Seite 122
Controls Climate
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air
is directed to the windshield, side windows,
upper body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program in such a way that window
condensation is prevented as much as possi‐
ble.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Intensity of the AUTO program
Pressing the AUTO button repeatedly adjusts
the intensity of the AUTO program. The se‐
lected intensity, SOFT, MEDIUM or INTEN‐
SIVE, appears on the display of the automatic
climate control.
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as
quickly as possible, if necessary with the maxi‐
mum cooling or heating capacity, and then
keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Maximum heating power can be obtained with
the highest setting, regardless of the external
temperature.
At the lowest setting, cooling is continuous, re‐
gardless of the external temperature.
Adjusting the ventilation temperature
This function can be used to adjust the air
temperature for the upper body region.
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Driver ventilation" or "Front passenger
ventilation"
4. Turn the controller to adjust the tempera‐
ture.
▷ Blue: colder
▷ Red: warmer
Defrosting and defogging windows
Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
For this purpose, also switch on the cooling
function.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper
wires are used as an antenna and are not part
of the rear window defroster.
Air volume, manual
You can vary the air volume by press‐
ing on the corresponding side. You
Seite 123
Climate Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
can reactivate the automatic mode for the air
volume with the AUTO button.
Manual air distribution
The air flow can be guided into the vehicle in‐
terior, separately for the driver's and front pas‐
senger side, using one of the following pro‐
grams:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
▷ Driver's side: in addition, the windshield,
side windows, and footwell.
Selecting program
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired program is shown on the
Control Display.
1 Air toward the windshield and side win‐
dows
2 Air for the upper body
3 Air to footwell
Pressing the AUTO button cancels the manual
air distribution settings.
The automatic mode for the air volume re‐
mains effective with manual air distribution.
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified and – de‐
pending on the temperature setting – warmed
again.
The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐
sation on the windows or to remove it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 148, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest
temperature, maximum air volume
and recirculated-air mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body
region. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx.
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
Automatic recirculated air mode/
recirculated air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and controls the shutoff auto‐
matically.
Seite 124
Controls Climate
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Right LED on, recirculated air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Make sure that air can flow onto the wind‐
shield.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐
ily.◀
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat
the interior.
Functional requirement
▷ Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been
switched off.
▷ Warm engine.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.
Switching on
1.
Switch off the ignition.
2. Press the right-hand button.
REST appears on the display of the automatic
climate control when the residual heat utiliza‐
tion is switched on.
From radio readiness the interior temperature,
the air volume and the air distribution can be
set.
Switching off
You can select the lowest blower speed by
pressing and holding the left side. Pressing
again switches off the residual heat utilization.
REST disappears from the display of the auto‐
matic climate control.
Switching on/off the automatic
climate control
Switching off
With the blower at its lowest setting,
press the left side of the button to
switch off the automatic climate control.
Switching on
Press any button to switch the automatic cli‐
mate control back on.
Front ventilation
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the
air flow
Avoiding injury
Do not drop any foreign objects into the
air vents, otherwise these could be catapulted
outwards and lead to injuries.◀
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vents to direct the flow of cool air in
your direction, for instance if the interior has
become too warm.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the air vents so that the air flows past you
and is not directed straight at you.
Seite 125
Climate Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Ventilation in rear
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the
air flow
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in‐
coming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
The service center replaces this combined fil‐
ter during routine maintenance.
More information can be found in the service
requirements display, refer to page 74.
Automatic climate control
with 4-zone control
Front operation
Corresponds to the operation of automatic cli‐
mate control with 2-zone control, refer to
page 122.
Rear operation
The control unit is located in the center con‐
sole in the rear.
1 Temperature, left rear seating area
2 AUTO program
3 Display
4 Temperature, right rear seating area
5 Seat heating, right rear seat
6 Air volume, manual
7 Seat heating, left rear seat
The current setting for the temperature and
the air flow rate is shown on display 3.
Activation/deactivation
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Rear climate control"
4. Select the desired settings.
The rear automatic climate control cannot be
operated if the front automatic climate control
is switched off. With the defrost windows and
eliminate condensation function activated, the
rear automatic climate control is also not ready
for operation.
Seite 126
Controls Climate
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
AUTO program
The AUTO program automatically
sets the air distribution toward the
upper body and in the footwell, as
well as the air flow rate. It also
adapts your instructions for the
temperature to outside influences throughout
the year.
Temperature
Set the desired temperature indi‐
vidually on the left and right side.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible regardless
of the season, using maximum cooling or heat‐
ing power if necessary, and then maintains it.
When switching between different tempera‐
ture settings in rapid succession, the auto‐
matic climate control does not have sufficient
time to adjust the set temperature.
Air volume, manual
The air flow rate can be varied by
pressing on the corresponding side.
The automatic mode for the air flow rate can
be switched on again using the AUTO button.
Switching off rear automatic climate
control
With the blower at its lowest setting,
press the left side of the button to
switch off the automatic climate control.
The automatic climate control can also be
switched off with iDrive. To switch on the auto‐
matic climate control again, the system must
first be reactivated, refer to Activating/deacti‐
vating.
The system is switched on again by pressing
any button of the rear automatic climate con‐
trol.
Ventilation in rear
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Thumbwheels to adjust temperature in up‐
per body region; can be adjusted sepa‐
rately for left and right:
▷ Blue: colder
▷ Red: warmer
3 Use the lever to change the direction of the
air flow
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior tem‐
peratures.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
ing a preset switch-on time. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, refrain from activating it
twice in succession without allowing the bat‐
tery to be recharged in normal operation be‐
tween use.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
They can be operated via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
Seite 127
Climate Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting activation times
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
5. Set the desired time.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reacti‐
vated.
Seite 128
Controls Climate
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Universal Garage Door
Opener
The concept
The Universal Garage Door Opener can be
used to operate up to 3 functions in remote-
controlled systems, such as garage door drives
or lighting systems. The Universal Garage
Door Opener replaces up to 3 different hand-
held transmitters. To operate it, the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med for the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the system is needed for the
programming procedure.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the Universal Garage Door
Opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐
mals, or objects in the range of movement of
the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there
is a risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for security reasons.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the operating instructions of
the system being operated, the system is gen‐
erally compatible with the Universal Garage
Door Opener.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of John‐
son Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview
mirror
1 LED
2 Buttons
3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro‐
gramming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press the right and left buttons on the inte‐
rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐
rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All
programmed settings of the buttons on the
interior rearview mirror are deleted.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys‐
tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1
to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons
Seite 129
Interior equipment Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
on the interior rearview mirror. The re‐
quired distance depends on the particular
hand-held transmitter.
4. Press the button of the desired function on
the hand-held transmitter and the button
being programmed on the interior rearview
mirror simultaneously and hold. The LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes
slowly at first.
5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, re‐
lease both buttons. Rapid flashing indi‐
cates that the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after
60 seconds, change the distance between
the interior rearview mirror and the hand-
held transmitter and repeat the step. Multi‐
ple trials at different distances may be nec‐
essary. Wait at least 15 seconds between
trials.
6. To program additional functions on other
buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be operated with the buttons
on the interior rearview mirror.
Special characteristics of alternating-
code radio systems
If the system cannot be operated after re‐
peated programming, check whether the sys‐
tem to be operated uses an alternating-code
system.
Read the operating instructions of the system
or press and hold the programmed button on
the interior rearview mirror. If the LED on the
interior rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first
and then lights up continuously for 2 seconds,
the system is equipped with an alternating-
code system. This flashing LED pattern re‐
peats itself for approx. 20 seconds.
In systems with an alternating-code system,
the Universal Garage Door Opener and the
system must be additionally synchronized.
Please obtain additional information on syn‐
chronization in the operating instructions of
the system being set up.
The systems will be easier to synchronize with
the aid of a second person.
Synchronization:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the corresponding button on the
interior rearview mirror as described.
3. Identify and press the synchronization but‐
ton on the system being set up. You have
approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Press and hold the button on the interior
rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and
then release it. Repeat this step up to three
times if necessary to complete the syn‐
chronization procedure. When synchroni‐
zation is completed, the programmed func‐
tion is executed.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis‐
tance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from
the memory buttons.
The required distance depends on the par‐
ticular hand-held transmitter.
3. Press the memory button of the Universal
Garage Door Opener.
4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit button on
the hand-held transmitter.
5. Release both buttons when the LED
flashes rapidly.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after ap‐
prox. 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step.
Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly
after approx. 60 seconds, change the dis‐
tance and repeat the step. If programming
Seite 130
Controls Interior equipment
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
was aborted by the hand-held transmitter,
hold down the memory button and press
and release the button on the hand-held
transmitter several times for 2 seconds.
Controls
Prior to operation
Before operating a unit with the Universal
Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no
people, animals, or objects in the range of
movement of the system; otherwise, there is a
risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror with the engine running or the igni‐
tion switched on. When you are within the re‐
ception range of the system, press and hold
the button until the function is initiated. The
LED on the interior rearview mirror lights up
continuously while the radio signal is being
transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press the right and left buttons on the interior
rearview mirror simultaneously for approx.
20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All
stored functions are deleted. The functions
cannot be deleted individually.
Digital compass
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen. The following adjustment op‐
tions are displayed one after the other, de‐
pending on how long the adjustment button is
pressed:
▷ Press briefly: switch the display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand
steering.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to the
vehicle's geographic location so that the com‐
pass can function correctly; refer to the world
map with compass zones.
Seite 131
Interior equipment Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Press the adjustment button for 3‑4 seconds.
The number of the compass zone set is shown
in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corre‐
sponding to the current location.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
▷ An incorrect compass direction is shown.
▷ The cardinal direction displayed does not
change even if the direction of travel
changes.
▷ Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1.
Make sure that there are no large metal ob‐
jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity
of the vehicle and that there is enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Press the adjustment button for 6‑7 sec‐
onds to call up C. Then drive at least one
full circle at a maximum speed of
4 mph/7 km/h. When the system is cali‐
brated, the C is replaced by the compass
directions.
Right-hand/left-hand steering
The digital compass is set for right-hand or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press the adjustment button for 12‑13 sec‐
onds. Briefly press the adjustment button
again to switch between English "E" and Ger‐
man "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Seite 132
Controls Interior equipment
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Opening
Front
To open the cover, slide it forward.
Rear
Slide the cover back.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition
switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
control with you when leaving the vehicle so
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
themselves.◀
Replace the cover after use
Replace the lighter or socket cover after
use; otherwise, objects that fall into the lighter
socket or power socket could cause a short
circuit.◀
Connecting electrical
devices
Note
Do not connect the charger to the socket
Do not connect the battery charger to
the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory
as this could damage the battery.◀
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on. The
Seite 133
Interior equipment Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volt.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Front center console
Slide the cover forward.
To access the socket: remove the cap or pull
out the cigarette lighter.
Rear center console
The arrangement of the sockets may vary with
the equipment.
To access the sockets: remove the caps.
In storage compartment under center
armrest
To access the socket: remove the cover.
In cargo area
To access the socket: fold open the cover.
In the rear console
Slide the cover back.
To access the socket: pull off the cover.
Seite 134
Controls Interior equipment
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Cargo area
Cargo cover
Deploy cargo cover by pulling back.
Do not deposit heavy objects
Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on
the cargo cover. Otherwise, they may present
a danger to occupants, for instance during
braking and evasive maneuvers.◀
Removing
1.
Grasp retracted cargo cover underneath
the upper fold on both sides.
2. Pull the cover back out of the side brack‐
ets.
3. Depending on your vehicle's equipment
package, you can store the cover under the
cargo floor cover in the cargo area.
Installing
When installing, proceed in the opposite order
of removal.
1.
Set the cargo cover into place on the left
and right sides.
2. Lift the back of the cover slightly and slide
forward until it snaps into the two side
brackets.
Enlarging the cargo area
The rear seat backrest is divided. You can fold
down both sides separately in order to expand
the cargo area.
Before folding down the rear seat back‐
rest
Before folding the rear seat backrest forward
or using the ski bag, remove beverage contain‐
ers from the cupholder and close the cu‐
pholder.◀
Reach into the recess and pull toward the
front.
Seite 135
Interior equipment Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Locking the backrest
Before letting passengers ride in the rear,
engage the seat backrests, locking them in
place. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac‐
cident due to unexpected seat movement.◀
Ensure that the lock is securely engaged
When folding back the backrest, be sure
that it locks in place securely. The red warning
field in the control display disappears. If it is
not properly engaged, transported cargo could
enter the passenger compartment during brak‐
ing or evasive maneuvers and endanger the
vehicle occupants.◀
Observe the instructions concerning the
safety belt
Observe the instructions concerning the safety
belt, refer to page 47. Otherwise, personal pro‐
tection may be compromised.◀
Seite 136
Controls Interior equipment
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Notes
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger
compartment without securing them; other‐
wise, they may present a danger to occupants
for instance during braking and avoidance ma‐
neuvers.◀
No non-slip mats on the dashboard
Do not use non-slip materials, such as
non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could be
damaged by the substances in the materials.◀
Glove compartment
Opening
Press the button. The covers open upward and
downward and the lighting in the glove com‐
partment switches on.
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀
Closing
Push the lower cover closed.
USB interface for data transfer
Port for importing and exporting data, such as
music collections, refer to page 197, on USB
devices.
Observe the following when connecting:
Seite 137
Storage compartments Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect a USB hard drive.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest front
Storage compartment
A storage compartment is located under the
armrest between the front seats and, depend‐
ing on the vehicle's equipment, also a cover for
the mobile phone cradle or the snap-in
adapter.
Details on this mobile phone cradle, refer to
page 237.
Opening
Push cover down slightly and press the button.
The cover folds upward.
Connection for an external audio
device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system:
▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 202.
▷ USB audio interface, refer to page 202.
Center armrest, rear
Pull on the loop and fold down the center arm‐
rest.
Storage compartments
Compartments are located in the doors, in the
center console in the front and rear, and in the
rear console.
Storage nets are located on the backrests of
the front seats.
Items in the storage nets
Do not stow hard or sharp-edged objects
in the storage nets; otherwise there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in the event of an acci‐
dent.◀
Clothes hooks
To fold out, press against upper edge.
Seite 138
Controls Storage compartments
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐
er's vision.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the
hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger
to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers.◀
Cupholders
Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is
the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐
tainers into the cupholders. This may result in
damage.◀
Front
Slide the cover back.
Rear
Slide the cover forward.
Folding down the rear seat backrest and
using the ski bag
Remove the beverage container before folding
the rear seat backrest forward or using the ski
bag; otherwise it may cause damage.◀
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol‐
lowing storage compartments can be found in
the cargo area:
▷ Storage compartments behind the remov‐
able side panels on the right and left in the
cargo area and under the cargo floor cover,
storage compartment on the right in the
cargo area.
▷ Storage well under the cargo floor cover.
▷ Retaining straps on the left and right side
trim for fastening small objects.
▷ Lashing rail with lashing eyes. You can se‐
cure heavy-duty cargo straps on the lash‐
ing eyes. They can be removed at the
notches in the rails. To move the lashing
eyes, press the button.
Read and comply with the information en‐
closed with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
Seite 139
Storage compartments Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Cargo floor cover
To access the onboard vehicle tool kit etc.
To open, swing up the flap by the handle, refer
to arrow.
The cargo floor cover is lockable.
Adaptive fixing system
The adaptive fixing system is used to divide up
the cargo area. It consists of two brackets with
a telescopic rail and retaining straps. These are
guided into the two rails on the cargo area
floor.
Securing cargo
Before using the adaptive fixing system,
fold up and lock the rear seat backrest; other‐
wise, the cargo could be thrown into the vehi‐
cle interior in an accident.◀
1 Brackets
2 Telescopic rail
3 Notch in the cargo area rail
Mounting brackets
The two brackets are connected with a tele‐
scopic rail.
1. Insert the brackets at the respective notch
in the rail on the cargo area floor.
2. Press down the brackets to push them into
the desired position.
3. Check the firm seating of the brackets.
They must be clearly heard to engage.
No cargo on brackets
Do not lay cargo on the brackets, as oth‐
erwise they could be unlocked.◀
Dividing up cargo area
The cargo can be positioned as follows:
▷ Between the rear seat backrest and the
telescopic rail
▷ Between the telescopic rail and the retain‐
ing strap
Positioning cargo between telescopic rail and
retaining strap:
1.
Lay the cargo on the telescopic rail. Press
the button, arrow 1, and route the retaining
strap around the cargo, arrow 2.
2. Hook the retaining strap into the mount 3
on the telescopic rail.
3. Press the button of the bracket, arrow 1.
The retaining strap is tensioned.
It is also possible to hook the two retaining
straps onto each other.
When the adaptive fixing system is no longer
needed, unhook the retaining strap and guide
Seite 140
Controls Storage compartments
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
it back into the bracket holding the hook to
prevent damage and injury.
Then slide the fastening system toward the
front in order to permit the best possible use of
the cargo area.
Removing brackets
Press down the brackets, slide them up to the
notches of the rails and remove them.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
adaptive fixing system can be stored under the
cargo floor cover in the cargo area.
Ski bag
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean trans‐
port of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to
2 snowboards.
Skis with a length of up to 6 ft/2.10 m can be
stowed using the ski bag. When stowing skis
with a length of 6 ft/2.10 m, the capacity of the
ski bag is reduced as the bag narrows.
Folding in display screen
Before loading the ski bag, fold in the
display screen of the DVD systems in the rear;
otherwise, the display screen could be dam‐
aged.◀
Loading
1. Fold down the center armrest, press the
button and open the cover.
2. Press the button again; the cover in the
cargo area opens. If you press the button
firmly the first time, this cover also opens.
3. Extend the ski bag between the front seats
and fill it.
4. Attach the retaining strap:
Attach the hook of the ski bag retaining strap
to the eyelet on the backrest.
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
Seite 141
Storage compartments Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con‐
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten‐
sioning buckle for this purpose.
Securing the ski bag
Secure the ski bag in this way. Failure to
do so may cause it to endanger occupants dur‐
ing braking or evasive maneuvers.◀
To store the ski bag, perform the above steps
in reverse order.
Removing ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g.,
for faster drying or to allow it to be put to other
uses.
1.
Pull the handle forward, arrow 1.
2. Take out the ski bag upward, arrow 2.
3. Close the cover in the cargo area.
More information on the various inserts availa‐
ble can be obtained from the service center.
Seite 142
Controls Storage compartments
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Seite 143
Storage compartments Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Driving tips
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speeds:
▷ 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
traction potential until after an initial breaking-
in period.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and discs. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing tailgate
Drive with the tailgate closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, passengers and other road users may be
endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if
an accident occurs or during braking or evasive
maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may
enter the passenger compartment.◀
If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven with
the tailgate open:
▷ Drive moderately.
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Seite 146
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot
exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐
ous personal injury as well as property dam‐
age.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,
there is the danger of getting burned.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is not recommended to use mobile phones,
such as mobile phones without a direct con‐
nection to an external aerial in the vehicle's
passenger compartment. Otherwise, the vehi‐
cle electronics and mobile communication de‐
vices can interfere with each other. In addition,
there is no assurance that the radiation gener‐
ated during transmission will be discharged
from the vehicle interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire
tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth,
refer to page 266.
Driving through water
Maximum water height: 17 inches/45 cm.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the
electrical systems and the transmission may
be damaged.◀
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsive‐
ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a
minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Do not let your foot rest on the brake
pedal
Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake
pedal. Even light but consistent pedal pressure
can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and
possibly even brake failure.◀
Objects in the area around the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again when they are returned after being
removed, such as for cleaning.◀
Seite 147
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required.
Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re‐
sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi‐
ciency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down in the manual mode of the au‐
tomatic transmission, refer to page 67.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the
brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐
sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear
and possibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.
In addition, steering and brake assist is un‐
available with the engine stopped.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops that exits under‐
neath the vehicle.
Therefore, traces of condensed water under
the vehicle are normal.
Driving on poor roads
Your vehicle combines an all-wheel drive sys‐
tem with the advantages of a normal passen‐
ger car.
Do not drive on unpaved terrain
Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as oth‐
erwise the vehicle may be damaged.◀
For your own safety and the safety of passen‐
gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following
points:
▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
driving; never take risks.
▷ Adjust speeds according to road condi‐
tions. The steeper and rougher the road
surface is, the lower the speed should be.
▷ When driving on steep uphill and downhill
grades: the engine oil and coolant should
be filled nearly to the MAX mark.
▷ Use Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to
page 99, on steep downhill grades.
▷ Watch for stones, holes, and other obsta‐
cles and drive around these where possi‐
ble.
▷ On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact
between the vehicle body and the ground.
The maximum ground clearance is 8 in‐
ches/20 cm and may vary with the loaded
cargo.
Seite 148
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ When driving through water, do not exceed
the maximum water height of 17 in‐
ches/45 cm.
Drive at walking speed only and do not
stop the vehicle.
▷ After driving through water, press on the
brake pedal several times at low speeds to
dry the brakes.
▷ Depending on the prevailing terrain, acti‐
vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer
to page 97, briefly.
▷ When the wheels spin, accelerate to ena‐
ble the driving stability control systems to
distribute the drive force to the individual
wheels.
▷ The stone chip guard reduces the risk of
damage to painted vehicle components,
such as in the area of the side skirts and
wheel arches. Your service center will be
glad to advise you.
After driving on poor roads
Adhere to the following points to ensure vehi‐
cle safety:
▷ Remove excessive accumulations of dirt
and mud from the vehicle body.
▷ Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels
and tires and check for damage.
Seite 149
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Loading
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
General information
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐
ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐
hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and
increases the rate at which damage develops
inside the tires. This could result in a sudden
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the cargo area
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
aged.◀
Determining the load limit
1.
Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs: 1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs =
650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transfered to your
vehicle. Consult the manual for transport‐
ing a trailer to determine how this may re‐
duce the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Seite 150
Driving tips Loading
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as
low as possible, ideally directly behind the
backrests.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.
▷ Do not pile cargo higher than the top edge
of the backrests.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Place protective material around any
sharp-edged or pointed objects that could
bump against the rear window while the
vehicle is in motion.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
Securing cargo
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps, a cargo net or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Four lashing eyes mounted in the cargo
area are used to secure these cargo straps,
refer to illustrations.
Adhere to the information included with
the cargo straps.
Securing cargo
Stow and secure the cargo as described
above; otherwise it may present a danger to
the occupants, for instance during braking and
avoidance maneuvers.
Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the
passenger compartment without securing
them; otherwise, they may present a danger to
occupants, for instance during braking and
avoidance maneuvers.
Seite 151
Loading Driving tips
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Never exceed either the approved gross vehi‐
cle weight or either of the approved axle loads,
as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard,
and may also place you in violation of traffic
safety laws.
Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten
the heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure
cargo using the upper top tether, refer to
page 55, mounting points; otherwise, these
may become damaged.◀
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Notes
A special rack system is available as an op‐
tional accessory.
Attachment
Follow the installation instructions for the roof-
mounted luggage rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not be too large in
area.
▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Fasten the roof-mounted luggage se‐
curely, for instance using lashing straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
tly.
Seite 152
Driving tips Loading
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance, refer to
page 274, can have an influence on fuel con‐
sumption and on the environmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or
rear luggage racks after use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Closing the windows and
glass sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof or windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation
pressure regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐
tion pressure, refer to page 262, at least twice
a month and before starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel
consumption and minimizes wear.
Seite 153
Saving fuel Driving tips
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the
accelerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Fuel savings are already achieved after the en‐
gine is turned off for as little as 4 seconds.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
consume additional fuel, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they
are not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your
service center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 274.
Seite 154
Driving tips Saving fuel
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Seite 155
Saving fuel Driving tips
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Navigation
This chapter contains various examples of how
the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Navigation system
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
General information
The navigation system can determine the pre‐
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
guide you to every entered destination.
Entries in stationary vehicle
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, and always give priority to the applica‐
ble traffic regulations in the event of any con‐
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle
occupants and other road users in danger.◀
Opening the navigation system
1. Press the button on the controller.
2. "Navigation"
The navigation system can also be called
up directly using the button on the con‐
troller.
Navigation data
Information on navigation data
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version"
Information is displayed on the data ver‐
sion.
Updating the navigation data
General information
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and
can be updated.
Current navigation data and the authorization
code are available from your service center.
▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐
date may take several hours.
▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery.
▷ During the update, only the basic functions
of the navigation system are available.
▷ The status of the update can be viewed.
▷ After the updating process is complete, the
system restarts.
▷ Remove the medium with the navigation
data after the update.
Performing an update
1.
Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga‐
tion DVD.
4. Change the DVD if necessary.
After the trip is interrupted, follow the instruc‐
tions on the Control Display.
Viewing the status
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Navigation update"
Seite 158
Navigation Navigation system
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Removing navigation DVD
1.
Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
Seite 159
Navigation system Navigation
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Destination entry
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
At a glance
In entering your destination you can select
from the following options:
▷ Enter the destination manually, see below.
▷ Select the destination from the address
book, refer to page 162.
▷ Last destinations, refer to page 163.
▷ Special destinations, refer to page 163.
▷ Destination entry via map, refer to
page 165.
▷ Using the home address as the destina‐
tion, refer to page 163.
▷ Destination entry by voice, refer to
page 166.
▷ Destination entry via the Concierge serv‐
ice, refer to page 165.
Entries in stationary vehicle
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, and always give priority to the applica‐
ble traffic regulations in the event of any con‐
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle
occupants and other road users in danger.◀
Manual destination entry
General information
The system supports you in entering street
names and house numbers by automatically
completing the entry and providing entry com‐
parisons, refer to page 24.
Stored town/city and street names can be
called up quickly.
▷ If the existing entries should not be
changed, the entries for the state/province
and town/city can be skipped.
▷ Destination guidance is started to the
town/city center if no street is entered.
Entering a state/province
1. Press the button.
2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Seite 160
Navigation Destination entry
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
The list is narrowed down further with each
entry.
3. Move the controller to the right.
4. Select the name of the town/city from the
list.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1.
Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city.
3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code
1.
Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the numbers.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Selecting an entry.
Entering a street and intersection
1.
Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
way as you would enter a town/city.
If there are several streets with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street.
3. Select the street.
Alternative: enter the street address
and house number
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/
city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the numbers.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Street does not exist in the
destination city/town
The desired street does not exist in the speci‐
fied city/town because it belongs to another
part of the city/town.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" with the state/province cur‐
rently displayed.
All streets of the selected state/province
are offered. The associated town/city is
displayed after the street name.
Seite 161
Destination entry Navigation
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street.
9. Select the street.
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add, refer to page 167, a destination as a
further destination.
Address book
Create contacts, refer to page 248.
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these addresses have been checked as
destinations in the contacts.
If the contacts with addresses from the
mobile phone are not displayed, they first
need to be checked as destinations, refer
to page 249.
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired,
with "A-Z search".
4. "Business address" or "Home address"
Storing the destination in the address
book
After entering the destination, store the desti‐
nation in the address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
6. Select an existing contact, if available.
7. "Business address" or "Home address"
8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
9. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
The current position can be stored in the ad‐
dress book.
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add
position to contact"
Seite 162
Navigation Destination entry
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐
isting contact from the list. Select the type
of address and enter the first and last
name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"
Using the home address as the
destination
The home address must be stored. Specify the
home address, refer to page 241.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
At a glance
The destinations previously entered are stored
automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
Calling up the last destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
Starting destination guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
Editing the destination
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
destinations"
Special destinations
General information
Even with the latest navigation data, informa‐
tion on specific special destinations may have
Seite 163
Destination entry Navigation
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
changed; for example, gas stations might not
be in operation.
Opening the search for special
destinations
Selection of special destinations, such as ho‐
tels or tourist attractions.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. Select the search function.
Online Search
1.
"Google™ Local Search"
2. Select a special destination.
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Start guidance"
A-Z search
1.
"A-Z search"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select or enter the town/city.
4. "Category"
5. Select the category.
6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, multiple
category details can be selected. Move the
controller to the left to leave the category
details.
7. "Keyword"
8. Enter the keyword.
A list of the special destinations is dis‐
played.
9. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connec‐
tion can be established if necessary.
10. Select the symbol.
11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 167.
"Start search": if a search term is not entered,
the search is repeated with the previous
search term.
Category search
1. "Category search"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select or enter the town/city.
4. "Category"
5. Select the category.
6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, multiple
category details can be selected. Move the
controller to the left to leave the category
details.
7. "Start search"
A list of the special destinations is dis‐
played.
8. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connec‐
tion can be established if necessary.
9. Select the symbol.
10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 167.
Display of special destinations
List of special destinations: special destina‐
tions are arranged by distance and appear with
a directional arrow pointing to the special des‐
tination.
Seite 164
Navigation Destination entry
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
In the splitscreen, special destinations of the
selected category are displayed in the map
view as symbols. The display depends on the
scale of the map and the category.
Destination entry via the Concierge
service
A connection is established to the Concierge
service, refer to page 251.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map view:
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the setting.
Destination entry by map
Selecting the destination
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
The current position of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the map.
3. "Interactive map"
4. Select the destination with crosshairs.
▷ To change the scale: turn the control‐
ler.
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and
turn it.
Specifying the street
If the system does not recognize the street,
one of the following pieces of information is
displayed:
▷ A street name in the vicinity.
▷ The county.
▷ The coordinates of the destination.
Additional functions
Additional functions are available on the inter‐
active map after the controller is pressed.
▷ Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Seite 165
Destination entry Navigation
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 167.
▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map
view.
▷ "View in northern direction" or "View in
driving direction"
▷ "Display destination": the map section
around the destination is displayed.
▷ "Display current location": the map section
around your current location is displayed.
▷ "Find points of interest": the search for
special destinations is started.
Destination entry by voice
General information
▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 25.
▷ When making a destination entry by voice,
you can change between voice operation
and iDrive.
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
Saying the entries
▷ The town/city, street, and house number
can be entered using a single command.
▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and
the language of the system differ.
▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
▷ The methods of entry depend on the navi‐
gation data in use and the country and lan‐
guage settings.
Entering the address in a command
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Enter address‹
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Say the address in the suggested order.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If necessary, individually name the sepa‐
rate components of the address, e.g., the
town/city.
Entering a town/city separately
The town/city can be said as a complete word.
With the destination entry menu displayed:
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
4. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
least the first three letters.
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/
cities may be suggested.
5. Select a location:
▷ Select a recommended town/
city: ›Yes‹.
▷ Select a different town/city: ›New
entry‹.
▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ...‹, for instance,
entry 2.
▷ Spell an entry: ›Spell city‹.
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in
a list and displayed as one location followed by
an ellipsis.
1.
Select an entry: ›Yes‹ or ›Entry ...‹, e. g., En‐
try 2.
2. Select the desired town/city.
Seite 166
Navigation Destination entry
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Entering a street or intersection
separately
Enter a street and intersection in the same way
as you would enter a town/city.
Entering a house number separately
Depending on the data in the navigation sys‐
tem, house numbers up to number 2,000 can
be entered.
1. ›House number‹
2. Say the house number.
Say each digit separately.
3. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
Starting destination guidance
›Start guidance‹
Planning a trip with
intermediate destinations
New trip
A trip can be planned with several intermediate
destinations.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left if necessary.
4. "Guidance"
5. "Enter new destination"
6. Select the type of destination entry.
7. Enter the intermediate destination.
8. "Start guidance"
Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations
can be entered for a trip.
1. "Enter new destination"
2. Select the type of destination entry.
3. Enter the intermediate destination.
4. "Add as another destination"
The intermediate destination is entered in
the destination list and is highlighted.
5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
destination is located at the desired loca‐
tion in the list.
6. Press the controller.
Starting the trip
1.
After all intermediate destinations are en‐
tered, highlight the first destination.
If the second destination, for example, is
highlighted when destination guidance is
started, the first destination is skipped.
2. "Start guidance"
This symbol marks the active leg of the
trip.
Storing a trip
Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If
necessary, delete existing trips to be able to
store new trips.
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter a name for the trip.
4. "OK"
Selecting a stored trip
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
Seite 167
Destination entry Navigation
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
3. Select a stored trip.
4. "Start guidance"
Changing the trip direction
Intermediate destinations are displayed in re‐
verse order in the list.
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Intermediate destination options
1.
"Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
▷ "Edit destination"
▷ "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
intermediate destination to another po‐
sition in the list.
▷ "Delete dest. in the trip"
▷ "Go to next dest. in the trip"
Some options are not available for certain trips.
Deleting a stored trip
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Highlight the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"
Opening the last trip
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. "Last trip"
4. "Start guidance"
Seite 168
Navigation Destination entry
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Destination guidance
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Starting destination
guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. Make a destination entry, refer to
page 160.
3. "Accept destination"
4. "Start guidance"
The route is shown on the Control Display.
The distance to the destination/intermediate
destination and the estimated time of arrival
are displayed in the map view.
The arrow view is displayed in the Head-up
Display and in some cases on the Control Dis‐
play.
Terminating destination
guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination
guidance
If the destination was not reached during the
last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
▷ The route calculated can be influenced by
selecting certain criteria.
▷ The route criteria can be changed when
the destination is entered and during desti‐
nation guidance.
▷ Road types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into consideration when
planning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
▷ The recommended route may differ from
the route you would take based on per‐
sonal experience.
▷ The settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
▷ Destination guidance with traffic bulletins,
refer to page 175.
Changing the route criteria
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Select the criterion:
▷ "Fast route": time-optimized route,
being a combination of the shortest
possible route and the fastest roads.
▷ "ECO PRO route" or "Efficient
route": optimized combination of the
fastest and shortest possible route.
Seite 169
Destination guidance Navigation
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ "Short route": short distance, irre‐
spective of how fast or slow progress
will be.
▷ "Alternative routes": if available, alter‐
native routes are suggested during ac‐
tive destination guidance.
The individual suggestions are high‐
lighted in color.
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if
necessary:
▷ "Avoid highways": highways are
avoided wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are
avoided wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible.
Route
Different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
▷ Arrow view.
▷ List of route sections.
▷ Map view, refer to page 171.
▷ Arrow view in the Head-up Display, refer to
page 118.
Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
▷ Large arrow: indicates the current direction
of travel.
▷ Street name of the road currently being
driven on.
▷ Small arrow: indicates the next change in
direction.
▷ Intersection view.
▷ Lane information.
▷ Traffic bulletins.
▷ Distance to the next change in direction.
▷ Street name at the next change in direc‐
tion.
Lane information
On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes
are marked in the arrow view by a triangle.
▷ Solid triangle: best lane.
▷ Empty triangle: possible lane. However,
another lane change may be needed
shortly.
Displaying a list of route sections
When destination guidance is active, a list of
the route sections can be displayed. The driv‐
ing distance and traffic bulletins are displayed
for each route section.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a route section.
The route section is displayed on the split
screen.
Bypassing a section of the
route
Calculate a new route for a route section.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
Seite 170
Navigation Destination guidance
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
3. "New route for"
4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of
kilometers within which you would like to
return to the original route.
5. Press the controller.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be by‐
passed:
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommendation
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta‐
tions along the route are displayed if needed.
Even with the latest navigation data, informa‐
tion on individual special destinations may
have changed; for example, gas stations might
not be in operation.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of the gas stations is displayed.
4. Highlight a gas station.
The position of the gas station is shown on
the split screen.
5. Select the gas station.
6. Select the symbol.
7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to
the selected gas station is started.
"Add as another destination": the gas sta‐
tion is added to the route.
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching spoken instructions on/off
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Voice instructions"
Repeating a spoken instruction
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Volume of spoken instructions
Turn the volume knob while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Saving the spoken instructions on the
programmable memory buttons
The function for switching the spoken instruc‐
tions on/off can be stored on a programmable
memory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac‐
cess.
Map view
Selecting the map view
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
Seite 171
Destination guidance Navigation
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
At a glance
1 Function bar
2 Route section with traffic obstruction
3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction
4 Planned route
5 Current location
6 Upper status field
7 Lower status field
Lines in the map
Streets and routes are displayed in different
colors and styles depending on their classifica‐
tion. Dashed lines represent railways and ferry
connections. Country borders are indicated by
thin lines.
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route indi‐
cate route sections with traffic obstructions,
depending on the map scale. The direction of
the triangles indicates the direction of the ob‐
struction.
The traffic signs indicate the significance of
the obstruction.
▷ Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the
planned route or direction.
▷ Grey traffic sign: the obstruction does not
affect the planned route or direction.
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 173.
Planned route
After destination guidance is started, the plan‐
ned route is displayed on the map.
Status fields
Show/hide: press the controller.
▷ Upper status field: time, telephone, and en‐
tertainment details.
▷ Lower status field: symbol for active desti‐
nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins,
time of arrival, and distance to destination.
Function bar
The following functions are available in the
function bar:
Symbol Function
Start/end destination guidance.
Switch spoken instructions on/
off.
Change the route criteria.
Search for a special destina‐
tion.
Display traffic bulletins.
Open the interactive map.
Set the map view.
Change the scale.
To change to the function bar, move the con‐
troller to the left.
Changing the map section
"Interactive map"
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐
troller in the required direction and turn it.
Changing the scale
1.
Select the symbol.
2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
Seite 172
Navigation Destination guidance
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Automatically scaled map scale
In the map view facing north, turn the control‐
ler in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐
played. The entire route between the current
location and the destination is displayed on the
map.
Settings for the map view
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. To set the map view:
▷ "Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings
depending on the light conditions.
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
setting is disregarded.
▷ "Satellite images"
Depending on availability and resolution,
satellite images are displayed at scales of
approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
1,000 km.
▷ "Perspective view in 3D"
Prominent areas that are contained in the
navigation data are displayed on the map in
3D.
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying traffic
bulletins, refer to page 174.
Symbols for the special destinations are no
longer displayed.
Map view for splitscreen
The map view can be selected for the split
screen independently from the main screen.
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen is selected.
4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale.
5. Select the map view.
▷ "Arrow display"
▷ "Map facing north"
▷ "Map direction of travel"
▷ "Map view with perspective"
▷ "Position"
▷ "Exit ramp view": selected blind drive‐
ways are displayed three dimension‐
ally.
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
6. To change the scale: select the split
screen and turn the controller.
Traffic bulletins
At a glance
▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐
tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa‐
tion of a traffic information service. Infor‐
mation on traffic obstructions and hazards
is updated continuously.
Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐
gation have the capability to display real-
time traffic information. If your system has
this capability the following additional
terms and conditions apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right
to use the Traffic Data in the event that the
End-User is in material breach of the terms
and conditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (“Total Traffic
Network”) holds the rights to the traffic in‐
cident data and RDS-TMC network
through which it is delivered. You may not
modify, copy, scan or use any other
method to reproduce, duplicate, republish,
transmit or distribute in any way any por‐
Seite 173
Destination guidance Navigation
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
tion of traffic incident data. You agree to in‐
demnify, defend and hold harmless BMW
of North America, LLC. (“BMW NA”) and
Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their
affiliates) against any and all claims, dam‐
ages, costs or other expenses that arise di‐
rectly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthor‐
ized use of the traffic incident data or the
RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of
this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or
unlawful activities by you in connection
herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐
mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
suppliers make no representations about
content, traffic and road conditions, route
usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to li‐
censee “as is,” and “where is”. Total Traf‐
fic Network, including, but not limited to,
any and all third party providers of any of
the licensed material, expressly disclaims,
to the fullest extent permitted by law, all
warranties or representations with respect
to the licensed material (including, without
limitation, that the licensed material will be
error-free, will operate without interruption
or that the traffic data will be accurate), ex‐
press, implied or statutory, including, with‐
out limitation, the implied warranties of
merchantability, non-infringement fitness
for a particular purpose, or those arising
from a course of dealing or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc.
or BMW NA will be liable to you for any in‐
direct, special, consequential, exemplary,
or incidental damages (including, without
limitation, lost revenues, anticipated reve‐
nues, or profits relating to the same) arising
from any claim relating directly or indirectly
to use of the traffic data, and even if Total
Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are
aware of the possibility of such damages.
These limitations apply to all claims, in‐
cluding, without limitation, claims in con‐
tract and tort (such as negligence, product
liability and strict liability). Some states do
not allow the exclusion or limitation of inci‐
dental or consequential damages, so those
particular limitations may not apply to you.
▷ The traffic bulletins are indicated on the
map by symbols.
▷ The traffic bulletins for the surrounding
area are stored in a list.
The symbol in the function bar of the
map view turns red if there are traffic bulle‐
tins that affect the calculated route.
Switching the reception on/off
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Opening the list of traffic bulletins
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
First, traffic bulletins for the calculated
route are displayed.
The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis‐
tance from the current position of the vehi‐
cle.
4. Select a traffic bulletin.
"More information": display additional
information.
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
if required.
Traffic bulletins on the map
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
The Control Display changes to a black and
white display. This enables a better view of the
traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disre‐
Seite 174
Navigation Destination guidance
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
garded in this setting. Symbols and special
destinations are not displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐
cation of the traffic obstruction along the route,
the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐
played.
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐
tion's length, direction, and impact are dis‐
played in the map using triangles or gray bars
along the calculated route.
▷ Red: traffic congestion
▷ Orange: stop-and-go traffic
▷ Yellow: heavy traffic
▷ Green: clear roads
▷ Gray: general traffic bulletins such as road
construction
The displayed information depends on the par‐
ticular traffic information service.
Filtering traffic bulletins
You can set which traffic bulletins appear on
the map.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired category.
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are
displayed on the map.
▷ Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the
route are always shown.
▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that
notify you of potentially dangerous situa‐
tions, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot
be hidden.
Destination guidance with traffic
bulletins
General information
Detour suggestions from the navigation sys‐
tem can be manually accepted when using
semi-dynamic destination guidance. When us‐
ing dynamic destination guidance, they are au‐
tomatically accepted for route guidance.
Semi-dynamic destination guidance
When traffic bulletin reception is switched on,
semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
The destination guidance system takes the
available traffic bulletins into account. A mes‐
sage is displayed depending on the route, the
traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes.
If possible, a detour is offered in case of traffic
obstructions.
The upper part of the message shows:
▷ Symbol of the first traffic obstruction, pos‐
sibly with the distance to the beginning of
the obstruction.
Seite 175
Destination guidance Navigation
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Total length of the traffic obstructions on
the route.
▷ Time by which the trip is extended due to
the traffic obstructions.
The lower part of the message shows:
▷ Detour recommendation with the distance
to the beginning of the detour.
▷ Difference between the length of the new
route compared to the original route.
▷ Time gained if the detour is taken com‐
pared to the original route with the traffic
obstructions.
Both the original route, shown in white, and the
detour are displayed on the split screen.
Accepting the detour
"Detour"
In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on
the road, a message is displayed without a de‐
tour suggestion.
Detours can also be accepted if the traffic
messages are called up in the list.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance
The route is automatically changed in the
event of traffic obstructions.
▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐
structions along the original route.
▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed
on the map.
▷ Depending on road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu‐
lated route may lead through the traffic ob‐
struction.
▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐
less of the setting.
Activating dynamic destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
Seite 176
Navigation Destination guidance
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
What to do if...
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
What to do if...
▷ The current transmission position cannot
be displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
system is currently determining the posi‐
tion. Reception is usually best when you
have an unobstructed view of the sky.
▷ The destination without street information
is not used for route guidance?
When city has been input, no downtown
can be determined. Input any street in the
selected city and start destination guid‐
ance.
▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐
ance?
The destination data are not contained in
the navigation data. Select a destination
that is as close as possible to the original.
▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐
lected?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a goal that is as
close as possible to the original.
▷ Is the map displayed in shades of gray?
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
The Control Display changes to a black
and white display. This enables a better
view of the traffic bulletins.
▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output
during route guidance in front of intersec‐
tions?
The area has not yet been fully recorded,
or you have left the recommended route
and the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new route suggestion.
Seite 177
What to do if... Navigation
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Entertainment
This chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio stations and playing CDs, DVDs,
and tracks from the music collection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Tone
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
General information
The sound settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Treble, bass, balance, and
fader
▷ "Treble": treble adjustment.
▷ "Bass": depth adjustment.
▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.
▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and
fader
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone settings.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer
Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
Adjusting the equalizer
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Seite 180
Entertainment Tone
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Multi-channel playback,
surround
Choose between stereo and multi-channel
playback, surround.
Setting multi-channel playback,
surround
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"
When surround is activated, multi-channel
playback is simulated when a stereo audio
track is played.
Volume
▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent vol‐
ume control.
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal com‐
pared to the entertainment sound output.
▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐
tertainment sound output.
▷ "Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone call.
▷ "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers
during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the
respective paired telephone: "Microphone",
"Loudspeak.".
Adjusting the volume
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting the tone settings
All tone settings can be reset to the default
setting.
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Seite 181
Tone Entertainment
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Radio
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Controls
1 Volume, on/off
2 Change wave band
3 Change station/track
4 Change entertainment sources
5 Programmable memory buttons
Sound output
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press
ON/OFF button on the radio.
Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
AM/FM station
Selecting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
All saved stations are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Changing the station
Turn the controller and press it
or
Press the button
or
Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer
to page 12.
Storing a station
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
Seite 182
Entertainment Radio
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
3. Highlight the desired station.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. To select the frequency: turn the control‐
ler.
To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period.
Renaming a station
An FM station with changing station names
can be renamed.
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename to:"
If necessary, wait for the desired name to
be displayed.
The selected station name is added to the list
of current stations and stored stations.
RDS
RDS broadcasts additional information, such
as the station name, in the FM wave band.
Switching the RDS on/off
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
HD Radio™ reception
Many stations broadcast both analog and digi‐
tal signals.
License conditions
HD Radio Technology manufactured under li‐
cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S.
and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD,
HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade‐
marks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Seite 183
Radio Entertainment
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
This symbol is displayed in the status line
when the audio signal is digital.
When tuning to a station with a digital signal, it
may take several seconds for the station to be
played back in digital quality.
Note on HD stations whose station name ends
in ...HD or with ...HD1:
In areas in which the station is not continu‐
ously received in digital mode, the playback
switches between analog and digital reception.
In this case, switch off digital radio reception.
Note on HD multicast stations whose station
name ends in ...HD2, ...HD3, ...:
In areas in which the station is not continu‐
ously received in digital mode, the audible sig‐
nal may be interrupted for several seconds.
This is reception related.
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional informa‐
tion on the current track, such as the name of
the artist.
1.
Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
This symbol indicates that a main station
also broadcasts additional substations. The
station name of the main station ends in HD1.
Station names of the substations end in HD2,
HD3, etc.
1.
Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
When reception is poor, the substation is
muted.
Satellite radio
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack‐
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐
phone.
Navigation bar overview
Symbol Function
Change the list view.
Select the category.
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Open the My Favorites cate‐
gory/open a favorite.
Manage the favorites.
Traffic Jump
The functions of the navigation bar symbols
can also be stored on the programmable mem‐
ory buttons, refer to page 23.
Managing a subscription
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
channels, you must have reception. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed
view of the sky. The channel name is displayed
in the status line.
Seite 184
Entertainment Radio
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Enabling channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐
gory.
5. Select the desired channel.
The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Select the phone number to have the
channel enabled.
You can unsubscribe from the channels again
via this phone number.
Unsubscribing from channels
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Manage subscription"
5. The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐
nels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Via the iDrive
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐
gory.
4. Select the desired channel.
Via the button on the radio
Press the button.
The next channel is selected.
Seite 185
Radio Entertainment
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Via direct channel entry
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Set channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired chan‐
nel is reached and press the controller.
Storing a channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Press the controller again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The channels can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Changing the list view
The list view changes every time the first sym‐
bol on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol Meaning
Channel name
Artist
Track
Selecting a category
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Timeshift
Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal
must be available.
The stored audio track can be played with a
delay following the live broadcast. When the
buffer is full, the older tracks are overwritten.
The buffer is cleared when a new channel is
selected.
Opening the timeshift function
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
▷ The red arrow shows the current playback
position.
▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is
displayed next to the buffer bar.
▷ For live transmissions "live".
Timeshift menu
Symbol Function
Go to the live broadcast
Playback/pause
Seite 186
Entertainment Radio
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Symbol Function
Next track
Previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
Automatic timeshift deactivated/
activated
Automatic timeshift
When the function is activated, audio playback
is stopped automatically in the event of:
▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
▷ Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
To activate:
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
To deactivate:
"Automatic time shift"
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favor‐
ites list. Available favorites are artist, track,
game, league, and team.
Storing the artist, track, or game
It is only possible to store favorites that are
currently being broadcast. The channel infor‐
mation must be available.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select the artist, track, or game.
Storing the league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favor‐
ites from a selection list.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
5. Select the league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
Opening the favorites
If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐
lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec‐
onds "Favorite alert!".
"Favorites"
Select the symbol while the message is
shown.
The displayed favorite is played.
Seite 187
Radio Entertainment
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
If there is no message, the system changes to
the My Favorites category. All favorites cur‐
rently being broadcast can be selected from a
list.
Managing the favorites
Activating/deactivating the favorites
Favorites can be activated and deactivated
globally and individually.
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐
ites.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Deleting favorites
1.
"Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region is broadcast every few minutes.
Selecting a region
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
Information for the selected region is broad‐
cast as soon as it is available.
A new panel opens.
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast
shortly.
Information is currently being
broadcast.
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius performs an update
of the channel names and positions. The up‐
date takes place automatically and may take
several minutes.
Notes
▷ Reception may not be available in some
situations, such as under certain environ‐
mental or topographic conditions. The sat‐
ellite radio has no influence on this.
▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels
or underground garages; next to tall build‐
ings; or near trees, mountains or other
powerful sources of radio interference.
Stored stations
General information
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1.
"Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Seite 188
Entertainment Radio
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Deleting a station
1.
"Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Seite 189
Radio Entertainment
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
CD/multimedia
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Controls
1 Volume, on/off
2 Eject CD/DVD
3 CD/DVD drive
4 Change station/track
5 Change the entertainment source
6 Programmable memory buttons
Sound output
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press
ON/OFF button on the radio.
Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
CD/DVD
Playback
Loading the CD/DVD player
Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up.
Playback begins automatically.
Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
pressed audio files.
Starting playback
A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or
in the CD/DVD changer.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player
... CD/DVD changer
CD/DVD player, rear
Playable formats
▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL,
DVD audio (video part only), DVD video.
▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA.
Seite 190
Entertainment CD/multimedia
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC,
M4A.
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button
Press the button for the appropriate
direction as often as necessary until
the desired track is played back.
Selecting the track using the iDrive
Audio CDs
Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
Depending on the data, some letters and num‐
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐
rectly.
1.
Select the directory if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
Displaying information on the track
If information about a track has been stored, it
is displayed automatically:
▷ Interpret.
▷ Album track.
▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD.
▷ File name of track.
Random playback
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
Seite 191
CD/multimedia Entertainment
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
4. Open "Options".
5. "Random"
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all
tracks within the selected directory are played
in random order.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Video playback
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region
can be played back; also refer to the informa‐
tion on the DVD.
Code Region
1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐
rica
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6 China
0 All regions
Playback
The video image is displayed on the Control
Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h;
in some countries, it is only displayed while the
parking brake is set or the automatic transmis‐
sion is in position P.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4. "DVD menu"
5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
Video menu
To open the video menu: turn the controller
during playback.
Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
Symbol Function
Open DVD menu
Starting playback
Pause
Stop
Next chapter
Previous chapter
Fast forward
Reverse
Seite 192
Entertainment CD/multimedia
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases
every time the controller is pressed. To stop,
start playback.
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
2. "DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display
depends on the contents of the DVD.
3. To select menu items: move the controller
and press it.
To change to the video menu: turn the control‐
ler and press it.
DVD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
the DVD.
Selecting the language
The languages that are available depend on
the DVD.
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"
4. Select the desired language.
Selecting the subtitles
The subtitles that are available depend on the
DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not
display subtitles".
Setting the brightness, contrast and color
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Selecting the zoom
Display the video image on the entire screen.
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
Seite 193
CD/multimedia Entertainment
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
Selecting a track
DVD video:
1.
Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
Selecting the camera angle
The availability of a different camera angle de‐
pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
CD/DVD changer
In the glove compartment
The BMW CD/DVD changer for six CDs/DVDs
is located in the glove compartment.
Controls and displays
1 Empty CD/DVD compartments
2 LEDs on the CD/DVD slot
3 Buttons for CD/DVD compartments
4 CD/DVD slot
5 Load CD/DVD compartments
Loading the CD/DVD compartments
individually
1. Press the button.
The LED on the first empty compartment
flashes.
2. Select another compartment if necessary.
3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash.
4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle.
Seite 194
Entertainment CD/multimedia
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and
placed into the selected compartment.
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the
CD/DVD or the CD/DVD changer could be
damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.◀
Loading all empty CD/DVD
compartments
1. Press the button for a longer pe‐
riod.
The LEDs on the empty CD compartments
flash.
2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to begin
flashing and then insert each CD or DVD
into the center of the slot.
The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically
and placed into the empty compartments.
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the
CD/DVD or the CD/DVD changer could be
damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.◀
After they are inserted, it may take several mi‐
nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.
Removing a single CD/DVD
1. Press the button.
2. Select the CD/DVD compartment.
The CD/DVD is partially ejected.
3. Remove the CD/DVD.
Removing all CDs/DVDs
1.
Press the button for a longer period.
2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.
Malfunctions
If all LEDs on the CD/DVD changer flash rap‐
idly, the system is malfunctioning.
To eliminate the malfunction:
1. Press one of the buttons:
▷
▷
The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected.
2. Remove the CD/DVD.
If the LEDs stop flashing rapidly, the CD/DVD
changer is functional again.
Audio playback
The audio track of a DVD can be played back
even if video playback is not possible in the ve‐
hicle.
Only the main film without the previews or ex‐
tras can be played back.
Starting playback
A DVD is located in the DVD changer.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
Selecting a chapter using the button
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired chapter is played.
Selecting a chapter using iDrive
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
Seite 195
CD/multimedia Entertainment
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
3. Select the desired DVD.
4. Select the desired chapter.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Selecting the language
The languages that are available depend on
the DVD.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Audio/language"
6. Select the desired language.
Notes
CD/DVD player and changer
Do not remove the cover
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do
not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise,
severe eye damage can result.◀
CDs and DVDs
Use of CDs/DVDs
▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
with labels applied, as these can be‐
come detached during playback due
to heat buildup and can cause irrep‐
arable damage to the device.
▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single
CDs; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter
may jam and no longer eject.
▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD
Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
longer eject.◀
General malfunctions
▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In
some instances they may be more sensi‐
tive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary de‐
vices would be.
▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa‐
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens,
and temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions involving individual CDs/
DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes:
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with
self-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent
data creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or old age of the blank CD/
DVD.
▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side
with a pen intended for this purpose.
Damage
▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
moisture.
▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played
or can only be played to a limited extent.
Seite 196
Entertainment CD/multimedia
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered US patents
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
of this copy protection must be approved by
Macrovision. Media protected by this product -
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision -
may only be used for private purposes. Copy‐
ing of this technology is prohibited.
DTS Digital Surround™
Manufactured under license under
U.S. Patent Numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other
patents granted and registered in the USA and
worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered
trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the
DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS,
Inc. All rights reserved.
Music collection
Storing music
General information
Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
can be stored in the music collection on a hard
disc in the vehicle and played from there.
▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐
pressed audio format. If available, informa‐
tion on the album, such as the artist, is
stored as well.
▷ CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the
CD/DVD or the USB device is stored in the
vehicle as an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A,
and AAC formats are stored. Individual
tracks and directories can be deleted later,
Deleting a track and directory, refer to
page 201.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored but cannot be played back.
Backing up music data
Regularly back up the music data; other‐
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the
hard disc.◀
Music recognition technology and re‐
lated data are provided by Grace‐
note®. Gracenote is the industry standard in
music recognition technology and related con‐
tent delivery. For more information, please visit
www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000, Gracenote up to now.
Gracenote-Software Copyright 2000, Grace‐
note up to now. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S. Pat‐
ents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773,
#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207,
#6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents is‐
sued or pending. Some services supplied un‐
der license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Pat‐
ent: #6,304,523.
Storing from a CD/DVD
1.
Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD
player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed and the first
track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the
storage process, the tracks are played in se‐
quence.
Seite 197
CD/multimedia Entertainment
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Observe the following during the storage proc‐
ess:
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not
remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player
as this will interrupt the storage process. You
can switch to the other audio sources without
interrupting the storage process. Tracks from
the current CD/DVD that have already been
stored can be called up.
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐
ning of the track at which storage was inter‐
rupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name
of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor‐
mation is available in the vehicle database or
on the CD.
To update the database, contact your service
center.
Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be con‐
nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment.
▷ Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐
ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 play‐
ers with a USB interface.
▷ Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐
tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music
from the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played
via the USB audio interface in the center
armrest.
▷ File systems: standard file systems for
USB devices are supported. The FAT 32
format is recommended.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 137.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
Playing music
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
Seite 198
Entertainment CD/multimedia
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
can be called up via the corresponding album,
refer to page 200.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
4. Select the desired category.
5. Select the desired entry.
▷ Select "A-Z search", refer to page 23,
and input the desired entry.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a cer‐
tain artist, call up that artist only. All of the
tracks by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Music search by voice
Instructions for voice activation system, refer
to page 25.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Music search‹
3. Open the desired category, e. g., ›Select
artist‹.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select other categories if you wish.
To select a track directly: ›Title ...‹
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in a single command.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by
the music search, or the album that was se‐
lected last.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Current playback"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Top 50
The 50 most frequently played tracks.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Seite 199
CD/multimedia Entertainment
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their stor‐
age dates.
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
The first track is played automatically, if
possible.
4. Change directories if needed to select
tracks.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
Random playback
All tracks of the selection are played back in
random order.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album
The name of the album, if available, is automat‐
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is not available, it can be changed later if
desired.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Seite 200
Entertainment CD/multimedia
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track
from that directory is being played.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing
up the music collection may take several
hours. Therefore, it is best to perform the
backup during a long trip.
1. Starting the engine.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 137.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music data import/export"
7. "Backup music on USB"
Storing the music collection in the vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the exist‐
ing music collection in the vehicle is replaced.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Seite 201
CD/multimedia Entertainment
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
External devices
At a glance
Symbol Meaning
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface
Music interface for smartphones
Bluetooth audio
AUX-IN port
At a glance
▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
Connecting
The AUX-IN port is in the center armrest.
Connect the headphone connector or line-out
connector of the device to the AUX-IN port.
Playback
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track on the audio device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. If necessary, "External devices"
4. "AUX front"
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Volume
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs
markedly from the volume of the other audio
sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. If necessary, "External devices"
3. "AUX front"
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
USB audio interface/music interface
for smartphones
At a glance
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated via iDrive.The sound is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Seite 202
Entertainment CD/multimedia
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Connectors for external devices
▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐
ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones
that are supported by the USB audio inter‐
face.
▷ Connection via snap-in adapter, refer to
page 237, when equipped with the music
interface for smartphones: Apple iPhone or
mobile phones.
Playback is only possible if no audio device
is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.
Due to the large number of different audio de‐
vices available on the market, it cannot be en‐
sured that every audio device/mobile phone is
operable on the vehicle.
Ask your service center about suitable audio
devices/mobile phones.
Audio files
Standard audio files can be played back:
▷ MP3.
▷ WMA.
▷ WAV (PCM).
▷ AAC, M4A.
▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.
File system
Standard file systems for USB devices are
supported. The FAT 32 format is recom‐
mended.
Connecting
The USB audio interface is in the center arm‐
rest.
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB
audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB in‐
terface.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐
ported by the USB audio interface.
Connection of a USB device via the USB
audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable to pro‐
tect the USB audio interface and the USB de‐
vice against physical damage.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface.
After connecting for the first time
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or
type of music, as well as playback lists are
transmitted into the vehicle. This may take
some time, depending on the USB device and
the number of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called
up via the file directory.
Number of tracks
Information from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more
than 36,000 tracks are stored, information on
existing tracks may be deleted.
Seite 203
CD/multimedia Entertainment
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights
Management (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
The playback starts with the first track.
The CD cover belonging to the track may ap‐
pear on the Control Display after several sec‐
onds.
Track search
Selection is possible via:
▷ Playback lists.
▷ Information: type of music, artist, and, if
available, composer, album, track.
▷ Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer.
Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Search"
5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre"
or "Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐
sired entry. When a letter is entered,
the results are filtered using this letter
as the first letter. If multiple letters are
entered, all results that contain that se‐
quence are displayed.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if all of the tracks by a certain ar‐
tist are to be displayed, call up that artist
only. All of the tracks by that artist are then
displayed.
7. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Playback lists
Calling up playback lists.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Seite 204
Entertainment CD/multimedia
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Random playback
The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐
dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the audio device operating
instructions.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in each case.
Information on connection
▷ The connected audio device is supplied
with a max. power of 500 mA if supported
by the device. Therefore, do not addition‐
ally connect the device to a socket in the
vehicle; otherwise, playback may be com‐
promised.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐
charge external devices.
Bluetooth audio
At a glance
▷ Music files on external devices such as au‐
dio devices or mobile phones can be
played back via Bluetooth.
Use of a mobile phone as an audio source,
refer to page 228.
▷ Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
▷ The sound is output on the vehicle loud‐
speakers.
▷ The volume of the sound output is de‐
pendent on the device. If necessary, adjust
the volume on the device.
▷ Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.
Requirements
▷ The device is suitable. Information at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer
to page 227, and on the device.
▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on
the device, such as for a connection with‐
out confirmation or visibility; refer to the
device operating instructions.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth
passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
Pairing and connecting
Pairing a device
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own
vehicle's occupants and to other road users,
only pair the device while the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. "Add new phone"
Seite 205
CD/multimedia Entertainment
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
5. Perform additional steps on the device, re‐
fer to the device operating instructions: for
instance, search for or connect the Blue‐
tooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle
on the device display.
You are prompted by the iDrive or device
to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
8. Select the desired functions with which the
device is to be connected, for instance
"Audio".
9. "OK"
If pairing was successful, the device is dis‐
played as connected.
White symbol : the device is active as an
audio source.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
fer to page 208.
Connecting a specific device
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source.
Connecting is not possible when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via
Bluetooth.
Requirements
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired devi‐
ces.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. Activate "Audio".
8. "OK"
Seite 206
Entertainment CD/multimedia
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Connecting the device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
White symbol : the device is active as an
audio source.
Playback
General information
▷ The display of music track information de‐
pends on the device.
▷ Operation can takes place on the device or
iDrive.
▷ Playback is interrupted when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via
Bluetooth.
Starting playback
1.
Connect the device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "External devices"
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select the desired track from the list, if
necessary.
Playback menu
Depending on the particular device, some of
the functions may not be available.
Symbol Function
Next track
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol.
Previous music track
Reverse: press and hold the symbol.
Disconnecting the audio connection
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. Highlight the desired device.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. "Audio"
7. "OK"
Unpairing a device
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.
Seite 207
CD/multimedia Entertainment
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Information on suitable devices can be found
at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 226.
The device is not supported by the vehicle.
▷ Perform a software update, refer to
page 208, if needed.
The device could not be paired or connected.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
and the vehicle match? Enter the same
passkey on the device and via iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing proce‐
dure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the device or vehicle? Delete
connections with other devices if neces‐
sary.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining bat‐
tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the
snap-in adapter or via a charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐
sible that only one device can be con‐
nected to the vehicle. Unpair the con‐
nected device from the vehicle and pair
and connect only one device.
▷ The device no longer reacts? Switch the
device off and on again.
▷ Repeat the pairing procedure.
Music cannot be played back.
▷ Start the program for playing back music
data on the device and select a track on the
device if necessary.
▷ Switch the radio on and off again.
Music files can only be played back softly.
▷ Adjust the volume settings on the device.
Playback is disturbed when buttons are
pressed or by other messages on the device.
▷ Switch off the button tones and other sig‐
nal tones on the device.
Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or
traffic bulletin and is not resumed automati‐
cally.
▷ Switch the radio on and off again.
Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is
connected via Bluetooth Audio while it is also
connected via the USB interface or the snap-in
adapter.
▷ Disconnect one of the two connections; for
example, disconnect the audio connection,
refer to page 207, and restart playback.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available,
please contact the hotline or service center.
Software Update
The vehicle supports various external devices
depending on the current software version.
With a software update, the vehicle can sup‐
port new mobile phones or new external de‐
vice, for example.
▷ USB.
Software updates and related current infor‐
mation is available at www.bmw.com/
update.
Displaying the current version
The currently installed software is displayed.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Software update"
Seite 208
Entertainment CD/multimedia
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
3. "Show current version"
Select desired version to display additional in‐
formation.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
1. Store the file for the software-update in the
main director of a USB flash drive.
2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB au‐
dio interface in the center armrest. An up‐
date via the USB interface in the glove
compartment is not possible.
3. "Settings"
4. "Software update"
5. "Update software"
6. "Start update"
7. "OK"
All listed software updates are installed.
Restoring the previous version
The software version prior to the last software
update can be restored.
The previous version can only be restored
when the vehicle is stationary.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Restore previous version"
4. "OK" Double-click.
All listed software updates are removed.
Note
While the software is being updated or a previ‐
ous version is being restored, BMW Assist, Of‐
fice functions, and the connected devices are
temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes
for the functions to become available again.
Seite 209
CD/multimedia Entertainment
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
DVD system in rear
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
General information
With the DVD system in the rear you can play
CDs and DVDs with audio, video and image
data. The DVD system can also play data from
attached external audio and video devices. Au‐
dio output is possible both via headphones
and via the vehicle speakers.
You can control the DVD system using the but‐
tons on the CD-/DVD player or using the re‐
mote control.
Some functions are operated using the remote
control.
Enabling DVD system
The DVD system can be enabled via iDrive.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Allow rear control"
3. "Rear DVD system active"
Controls
1 Display screen
2 Infrared interface for headphones
3 CD/DVD player
4 Headphone connection: jack plug
5 12 V sockets 133
Folding in display screen
When using the ski bag or when transporting
bulky pieces of luggage, the display screen
should be folded in, as otherwise it may be
damaged.
Note when the display screen is folded
down
When the screen is folded down, do not open
the lid of the center armrest or rest your arm on
the screen; otherwise, you may damage the
screen.◀
Seite 210
Entertainment DVD system in rear
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
1. Turn the display screen, arrow 1
The display screen switches off.
2. Fold down the display screen, arrow 2.
The display screen is folded out in the reverse
order.
CD/DVD player
Controls
1 Press: switch the DVD system on/off
Turn: volume for headphones with jack
plug, left
2 Eject CD/DVD
3
Beginning of track
Stop
Playback, pause, freeze frame
Next track
4 CD/DVD slot
5 Connectors for external device: cinch
sockets
6 Press: switch the DVD system on/off
Turn: volume for headphones with jack
plug, right
Connecting headphones
You can connect headphones with a jack plug
or operate them using the infrared interface.
To enable optimal use of the infrared interface,
use infrared headphones that comply with the
IEC 61603-2 standard.
Compatible infrared headphones and informa‐
tion about supported headphones are available
at your service center.
When using infrared headphones, it is impor‐
tant not to interrupt the infrared connection
between the headphones and the infrared in‐
terface. This means that no obstacle should
come between the two and that the cover of
the infrared interface should not be covered or
scratched. Unfavorable lighting conditions
such as glare from outside can interfere with
reception.
Remote control
1 Menu navigation
2 Volume for headphones with jack plug
3 Changing track or chapter during CD-,
DVD- or AUX playback, fast forward/rewind
4 Headphones right/left
5 Open start menu for DVD system
Seite 211
DVD system in rear Entertainment
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Menu navigation
You can use the thumbwheel and buttons 1 to
navigate through the menus.
▷ Turn the thumbwheel: select a menu item.
▷ Press the arrow buttons: change between
fields.
▷ Press the button: activate the menu
item.
Changing batteries
1. Press the detent and remove the cover.
2. Change the batteries. The type and instal‐
lation position are marked on the bottom of
the battery compartment.
3. Close the cover.
Take the used battery to a recycling
center or to your service center.
Setting the language of the
DVD system
1.
Select a CD/DVD track.
2. Press the button.
3. Select "Tone".
4. Press the button.
5. Switch to the top window.
6. Select "Language".
7. Press the button.
8. Select the desired language.
9. Press the button.
Sound output via speakers
In addition to the headphones, you can also
play the sound via the vehicle speakers.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. "AUX rear"
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
Switching DVD system on/off
Press the button on the CD-/DVD player or un‐
der the desired screen.
The DVD system switches on automatically
when a CD or DVD is inserted.
Playing CD/DVD
Use the following menu items to access data
from a CD/DVD:
▷ Video data via "DVD"
▷ Audio data via "CD"
▷ Images "Photo"
Seite 212
Entertainment DVD system in rear
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Playing videos from CDs/
DVDs
Country codes of DVDs
Your DVD player only plays DVDs with the
coding of your home region, e.g., Europe=2.
The country codes supported by your DVD are
contained in the information on your DVD.
An overview of the coding zones:
Code Region
1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐
rica
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6 China
DVDs with the code 0 can be played on all de‐
vices.
Starting playback
1.
Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the la‐
beled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is
automatically pulled in.
▷ Playback begins automatically after a
few seconds.
▷ Otherwise: select "DVD".
2. If the DVD control or the DVD-specific
menu is displayed when a DVD is inserted,
use the remote control buttons for menu
navigation to select the desired option.
Or:
Press the button on the CD/DVD
player.
You can control the playback with the buttons
on the CD/DVD player or the DVD control.
Video CDs (VCDs) and Super Video CDs
(SVCDs) can only be played if they do not have
a DVD-specific menu.
Eject CD/DVD
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
DVD control
With the DVD control, you can select the title
and chapter, open the DVD-specific menu, and
operate functions such as Language, Fast for‐
ward and Reverse or Freeze frame.
A DVD can briefly deactivate functions of the
DVD control, under certain circumstances
while the entire DVD is being played. It is not
possible to operate the DVD control under
these circumstances. In this case, try to make
the selection using the DVD-specific menu.
1.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol during playback.
2. Press the buttons on the remote con‐
trol or turn the thumbwheel to select the
desired function.
3. Press the button.
Symbol Function
Exit DVD control
"SET" Settings for playing DVDs.
Start playback.
Stop playback.
Seite 213
DVD system in rear Entertainment
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Symbol Function
Activate and deactivate freeze
frame.
Skip a chapter.
Fast forward/reverse.
"Menu" Open the DVD-specific menu.
The DVD control disappears again after a short
time if you have not selected a function.
Or:
Press the button on the remote control
to exit the DVD control.
Fast forward/reverse
Forward/reverse with DVD control
1.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol during playback.
2.
Select the symbol.
3. Press the button.
4. Press the button several times to in‐
crease the fast forward/reverse speed.
The DVD playback will be distorted.
To cancel fast forward/reverse:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Press the button.
Or:
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
The DVD will start play at the point selected.
Forward/reverse with remote control
Press and hold the button until you
reach the desired point.
Or:
1.
During playback, turn the thumbwheel.
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted.
2. Continue to turn the thumbwheel. The
speed is increased.
3. Press the button on the CD/DVD
player. Fast forward/reverse is interrupted.
The DVD will start play at the point se‐
lected.
Skipping chapter
You can change to the next or previous chap‐
ter during playback.
1. Press the button on the remote con‐
trol during playback.
2.
Select the symbol.
3. Press the button repeatedly, continuing
until you reach the desired chapter.
Or:
Press the button on the left or right on
the remote control repeatedly until you reach
the desired chapter.
Freeze frame
1.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol during playback.
2.
Select the symbol.
3. Press the button.
To continue playback:
1. Select the or symbol.
2. Press the button.
As an alternative, you can also stop and con‐
tinue playback with the button on the
CD/DVD player.
Seite 214
Entertainment DVD system in rear
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Making settings for DVD
1. Press the button during playback.
2. Make the settings with the remote control:
▷ "Video settings":
▷ "Brightness", "Color", and "Contrast"
on the screen.
▷ After switching to the top window, you
can change other settings.
"Language": the system language of
the DVD system
"Display": background brightness of
the screen.
▷ "Tone":
▷ "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa‐
rately adjustable for the left and right
headphones and the infrared head‐
phones.
▷ "Reset": the settings are reset to the
default values.
▷ "DVD format":
▷ "Standard"
▷ "Zoom": full-screen playback.
▷ "Language": language of the DVD play‐
back. The language advances one setting
each time the menu item is selected.
▷ "Subtitles": language of the subtitles or
turn off the subtitles.
▷ "Title": select individual tracks on the DVD.
▷ "Angle of view": camera angle.
Information or symbols that appear during
the playback of a film generally point out
different camera angles. These are usually
only briefly available.
▷ "Menu": open the DVD-specific menu.
▷ "Return": exit the menu, or:
Press the buttons on the remote con‐
trol.
Many DVDs offer dialogs and subtitles in vari‐
ous languages or scene descriptions for the
hearing impaired. These functions are stored
on the DVD.
With some DVDs, it is only possible to select
language, subtitles, camera angle, or title by
using the DVD-specific menu. Consult the in‐
formation accompanying your DVD.
Opening the DVD-specific menu
Additional functions may be available on DVDs.
It is thus possible, for example, to select from
among several possible actions or to access
information about the film.
1.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol during playback.
2. Select "Menu".
3. Press the button.
On some DVDs, you can use "Main menu"
and "Title" to access additional menus in
which you can select music scenes, for ex‐
ample.
To make a selection:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Press the button until the desired func‐
tion is selected.
3. Select the arrow.
4. Press the button.
To return to the start menu:
1.
Select the arrow.
2. Press the button.
You can also select language, subtitles, cam‐
era angle, or title in the DVD-specific menu.
Seite 215
DVD system in rear Entertainment
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Consult the information accompanying your
DVD.
Compressed video files
Playback
1. Select the directory if necessary.
2. Press the button.
3. Select a track.
4. Press the button.
5. Select "Play".
6. Press the button.
To change the directory:
1.
Select the directory.
2. Press the button.
Playback functions
1. Select a track.
2. Press the button.
3. Select a menu item:
▷ "Pause": stop and continue playback.
▷ "Repeat track": repeat the selected
track.
▷ "Repeat directory": repeat the tracks in
the current directory.
4. Press the button.
Playing audio tracks from
CD/DVD
Starting playback
Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the la‐
beled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is au‐
tomatically pulled in.
▷ Playback begins automatically after a few
seconds.
▷ Otherwise: select "CD".
Press the button.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, refer
to page 218, can take approx. 1 minute to
read, depending on their directory structure.
To play back audio tracks from a DVD, refer to
Compressed audio files, refer to page 218.
To start playback if a CD is already in the drive:
1.
Open the start menu with the remote con‐
trol.
2. Select "CD".
Seite 216
Entertainment DVD system in rear
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
3. Press the button.
As an alternative, you can also control the play‐
back with the buttons on the CD/DVD player.
To eject CD/DVD:
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
Selecting a track
Buttons on CD/DVD player
Press the button for the correspond‐
ing direction repeatedly until you reach the de‐
sired track.
Playback begins at the start of the track.
Using the remote control
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly or turn the thumbwheel
until you reach the desired track.
Playback begins at the start of the track.
Settings and playback functions for
audio CDs
1.
Select "SET".
2. Press the button.
3. Make the settings with the remote control:
▷ "Tone":
▷ "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa‐
rately adjustable for the left and right
headphones and the infrared head‐
phones.
▷ "Reset": the settings are reset to the
default values.
▷ "Pause": stop and continue playback.
▷ "Random": the CD tracks are played back
once in random sequence.
▷ "Scan": brief samples of all CD tracks are
automatically played one after another.
▷ "Repeat": repeat the current track. Select
again to end.
To exit from the menu:
Press the buttons on the remote control.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the CD/DVD player:
Press and hold the button for the
corresponding direction.
Seite 217
DVD system in rear Entertainment
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Compressed audio files
Playback
1. Select the directory if necessary.
2. Press the button.
3. Select a track.
4. Press the button.
5. Select "Play".
6. Press the button.
To change the directory:
1.
Select the directory.
2. Press the button.
Settings and playback functions for
compressed audio files
1. Select a track.
2. Press the button.
3. Make the settings with the remote control:
▷ "Tone":
▷ "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa‐
rately adjustable for the left and right
headphones and the infrared head‐
phones.
▷ "Reset": the settings are reset to the
default values.
▷ "Pause": stop and continue playback.
▷ "Scan directory": briefly sample the tracks
in the current directory.
▷ "Scan all": briefly sample all tracks.
▷ "Random directory": play the tracks in the
current directory in a random sequence.
▷ "Random all": play all tracks in a random
sequence.
▷ "Repeat track": repeat the selected track.
▷ "Repeat directory": repeat the tracks in the
current directory.
▷ "Details": display any stored information on
the current track.
To exit from the menu:
Press the buttons on the remote control.
Displaying images from
CD/DVD
1.
Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the la‐
beled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is
automatically pulled in.
2. Open the start menu with the remote con‐
trol.
3. Select "Photo".
4. Press the button.
Seite 218
Entertainment DVD system in rear
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Displaying overview
1. Select the subdirectory if necessary.
2. Select "Overview".
3. Press the button.
It may take some time until the overview is
completely displayed.
If a symbol appears instead of an image, the
image cannot be displayed in the overview.
Displaying images
1.
Use the buttons or the thumbwheel of the
remote control to select an image.
2. Press the button.
3. Displaying images:
▷ Scroll using the menu navigation but‐
tons of the remote control.
▷ Display the slide show: turn the thumb‐
wheel to set the display duration of the
images.
Stop the slide show: select "Stop".
Adjusting
1. Press the button.
2. Select a menu item:
Symbol Function
Return to the photo menu.
"SET" Adjust the "Display".
"Language": after switching to
the top window, the system lan‐
guage can be changed.
Start the slide show.
Display the first/last image of
the current directory.
Rotate the image by 90°.
"Overview" Change to the image overview.
Ending display
1.
Press the button.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Press the button.
Eject CD/DVD
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
Seite 219
DVD system in rear Entertainment
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Information on CD/DVD
player
Safety notes
Do not remove the cover
The BMW CD/DVD player is a Class 1 la‐
ser product. Do not operate if the cover is
damaged; otherwise, severe eye damage can
result.◀
Suitable media
Use of CDs/DVDs
▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
with labels applied, as these can be‐
come detached during playback due
to heat buildup and can cause irrep‐
arable damage to the device.
▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single
CDs; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter
may jam and no longer eject.
▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD
Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
longer eject.◀
The CD/DVD player can play the following me‐
dia:
▷ Video DVD.
▷ CD-DA (audio CD).
▷ CDs/DVDs with compressed image data.
▷ CDs/DVDs with compressed audio data.
▷ CDs/DVDs with compressed video data.
The DVD player does not support DVD audio.
However, many audio DVDs available in stores
also contain a video track in the DVD Video for‐
mat in addition to the audio track. These DVDs
can be played back by the DVD player. Refer to
the information on your DVD to determine
whether your audio DVD contains an additional
video track. Depending on the authoring used,
it is possible that not all functions are available
during playback.
Dual-sided DVDs available from retail suppliers
are coated on both sides and bear no mark‐
ings. This means both sides are information
carriers. To play the information on the other
side, turn over the DVD.
Supported formats
Depending on the compression method used,
not all files of the specified formats can be
opened.
Images
▷ JPEG/JPG.
With very large image files, it can take longer
for the images to be displayed.
Compressed audio files
▷ MP3.
▷ WMA.
▷ OGG.
▷ AAC.
Compressed video files
▷ SVCD.
▷ MPEG1.
▷ MPEG2.
▷ MPEG4/DivX.
Digital Rights Management (DRM)
In some cases, it may not be possible to play
CDs/DVDs with integrated Digital Rights Man‐
agement (DRM).
General malfunctions
▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In
some instances they may be more sensi‐
tive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary de‐
vices would be.
▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Seite 220
Entertainment DVD system in rear
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Foreign bodies/liquids in the CD/DVD
slot
Make sure that no foreign objects or liquids get
into the CD/DVD slot; otherwise, the CD/DVD
player will be damaged.◀
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa‐
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens,
and temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions involving individual CDs/
DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes.
Copied or self-recorded CDs/DVDs
▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with
home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsis‐
tent data creation or recording processes,
or poor quality or old age of the blank CD/
DVD.
▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side
with a pen intended for this purpose.
Damaged CDs/DVDs
▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
moisture.
▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐
tection feature by the manufacturer. As a re‐
sult, some CDs/DVDs cannot be played, can
only be played to a limited degree, or cause the
system to switch off. In this case, wait a short
while and then switch the system back on
again. Then remove the CD/DVD from the
drive.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio
files
If the language set for the CD/DVD player does
not match the language of the music track, the
music tracks may be displayed incorrectly.
External device
Connecting
1 Connections for audio/video cables. Watch
the colors of the sockets when connecting.
Yellow socket: video
White socket: audio on left
Red socket: audio on right
2 Power supply for external device: socket
with removable cap.
Playback
1.
Switch on the external device and start the
playback.
2. Open the start menu with the remote con‐
trol.
Seite 221
DVD system in rear Entertainment
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
3. Select "AUX".
4. Press the button.
For devices without a video signal, for instance
MP3 players, "No video signal" appears on the
display. The sound is nevertheless played.
Settings for external devices
1.
Press the button during playback.
2. Make the settings with the remote control:
▷ "Video settings":
▷ "Brightness", "Color", and "Contrast"
of the video playback.
▷ "NTSC color": the color can be ad‐
justed on an external device with the
NTSC standard.
▷ "Standard": the DVD system can be
adapted to external devices with differ‐
ent TV standards; to do so, consult the
operating manual of the external de‐
vice.
▷ "Reset": the settings are reset to the
default values.
▷ "Tone":
▷ "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa‐
rately adjustable for the left and right
headphones and the infrared head‐
phones.
▷ "Reset": your settings are reset.
▷ After switching to the top window, you
can change other settings.
"Audio": adjust the volume of the ex‐
ternal device to the volume of the
CD/DVD player.
"Language": the system language of
the DVD system.
"Display": background brightness of
the screen.
▷ "Video Format":
▷ "Standard"
▷ "Zoom": full-screen playback.
To exit from the menu:
Press the buttons on the remote control.
Seite 222
Entertainment DVD system in rear
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Seite 223
DVD system in rear Entertainment
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Communication
All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business
partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Telephone
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
At a glance
The concept
Mobile phones or other external devices such
as audio players can be connected to the vehi‐
cle via Bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth® SIG, Inc.
After these devices are paired once, they are
recognized automatically when the ignition is
switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle
and can then be operated via iDrive, the but‐
tons on the steering wheel, and via voice acti‐
vation.
Depending on their functionality, external devi‐
ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone
or as an audio source. The telephone functions
are described in the following. Operating the
audio functions, refer to page 205.
Up to four external devices can be paired.
Certain functions may need to be enabled by
the mobile phone provider or service provider.
Using the mobile phone while driving
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone
in your hand while you are driving; use the
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐
serve this precaution, you can endanger the
vehicle occupants and other road users.◀
Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter is used to:
▷ Hold the mobile phone.
▷ Recharge the battery.
▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside
antenna of the vehicle.
This provides for better network reception
and consistent sound quality.
Approved mobile phones
Details on which mobile phones and external
devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup‐
ported by the mobile phone preparation pack‐
age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
The vehicle identification number and software
part number are needed to determine which
mobile phones are supported by the mobile
phone preparation package. The software ver‐
sion of the mobile phone may also be required.
1.
"Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
These approved mobile phones with a certain
software version, support the vehicle functions
described below.
Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
phones or software versions.
Do not operate a mobile phone that is con‐
nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key‐
pad, as this may lead to a malfunction.
A software update, refer to page 208, can be
performed if necessary.
Seite 226
Communication Telephone
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Pairing/unpairing the mobile
phone
General information
The following functions are available:
▷ Use of a mobile phone as a telephone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an additional te‐
lephone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an audio source.
▷ Use of an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 205.
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is suitable, refer to
page 226.
▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone.
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be
made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con‐
nection without confirmation or visibility,
refer to the mobile phone operating in‐
structions.
▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth
passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Com‐
ply with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth®"
Additional functions
Activating/deactivating the additional
functions
Activate the functions before pairing to be able
to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit‐
able mobile phones, refer to page 226, that
support this function.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. Select the desired additional function.
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Office"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
6. "OK"
An additional function cannot be assigned to a
telephone while it is deactivated.
Additional telephone
A mobile phone can be used as an additional
telephone.
The additional telephone can be used to ac‐
cept incoming calls, refer to page 231. While a
Seite 227
Telephone Communication
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
call is active on the additional telephone, re‐
ceived calls are displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Audio source
A mobile phone can be used as an audio
source.
Pairing and connecting a mobile
phone
Pairing the mobile phone
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own
vehicle's occupants and to other road users,
only pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is
stationary.◀
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
instructions: for instance, search for or
connect the Bluetooth device or a new de‐
vice.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle
on the mobile phone display.
6. You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile
phone to enter the same Bluetooth pass‐
key. Enter the passkey and confirm.
or
Compare the control number on the vehi‐
cle display with the control number on the
mobile phone display. Confirm the control
number on the mobile phone and in the ve‐
hicle.
"OK"
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
8. "OK"
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
The functions supported by the mobile phone
and audio device are displayed as symbols
when paired.
White symbol: the function is active.
Gray symbol: the function is inactive.
Symbol Function
Telephone.
Additional telephone.
Audio source.
Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐
hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be
connected with the vehicle at once.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
fer to page 229.
Following the initial pairing
▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected
in the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition
is switched on.
▷ The phone book entries of the telephone
stored on the SIM card or mobile phone
are transmitted to the vehicle after detec‐
tion, depending on the mobile phone.
▷ Four mobile phones can be paired.
▷ Specific settings may be necessary in
some mobile phones, e.g., authorization or
a secure connection; refer to the mobile
phone operating instructions.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
Seite 228
Communication Telephone
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐
nected.
The functions assigned to the mobile phone
before unpairing are assigned to the mobile
phone when it is reconnected. These functions
are deactivated in a mobile phone that is al‐
ready connected.
Configuring the mobile phone
Additional functions can be activated or deacti‐
vated for paired and connected mobile phones.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config‐
ured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. At least one function must be selected.
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Audio"
7. "OK"
If a function has already been assigned to an‐
other connected mobile phone, the function is
deactivated in that mobile phone and the mo‐
bile phone is unpaired when the function is as‐
signed to a new mobile phone.
Swapping the telephone and
additional telephone
The function of the telephone and additional
telephone can be swapped automatically.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Unpairing the mobile phone
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be
unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 226.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
nected.
▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in
the vehicle and on the mobile phone.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing proce‐
dure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle? De‐
lete connections with other devices if nec‐
essary.
▷ Is the audio connection activated? Deacti‐
vate the audio connection.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining bat‐
tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the
snap-in adapter or via the charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐
sible that only one mobile phone can be
connected to the vehicle. Unpair the con‐
Seite 229
Telephone Communication
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
nected mobile phone from the vehicle and
pair and connect only one mobile phone.
The mobile phone no longer reacts.
▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or
low? Do not expose the mobile phone to
extreme environmental conditions.
The telephone functions are not available.
▷ Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
telephone and is the additional telephone
function deactivated? Activate the func‐
tion.
▷ Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect
the mobile phone as a telephone.
No phone book entries or only some phone
book entries are displayed, or they are incom‐
plete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,
e. g., due to stored information such as
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
tact.
▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source or additional telephone? The mo‐
bile phone must be connected as a tele‐
phone.
The phone connection quality is poor.
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact Customer Relations or the service center.
Controls
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐
lected. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume
of the microphone on the telephone and the
volume of the called party. Depending on the
mobile phone, the volumes may need to be ad‐
justed. The settings can only be created during
a call and must be adjusted separately for each
telephone. The settings are deleted when the
telephone is unpaired.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone"
or "Loudspeak."
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Seite 230
Communication Telephone
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the
phone book and is transmitted by the network,
the name of the contact is displayed. Other‐
wise, only the phone number is displayed.
If more than one phone number is assigned to
a contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐
played.
For calls on the additional telephone, the num‐
ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the
network.
An incoming call to one of the telephones is
automatically rejected if there is an active call
on the other telephone.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
or
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
or
1.
"Telephone"
2. "End call"
Entering a phone number
Dialing a number
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select the symbol.
The phone number can also be entered by
voice.
Calls with multiple parties
General information
You can switch between calls or connect two
calls to a single conference call. These func‐
tions must be supported by the mobile phone
and service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
adjusted accordingly.
Seite 231
Telephone Communication
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
If a second call comes in during an ongoing
call, a call waiting signal is sounded.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish an additional call during an active
call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it
from a list.
"Return"
The call on hold is resumed.
Switching between two calls, hold call
The active call is displayed in color.
The call on hold is displayed in gray.
"Swap calls"
The call on hold is resumed.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐
phone conference call.
1.
Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
Switching the microphone to mute
When a call is active, the microphone can be
muted.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone mute"
A microphone that has been switched to mute
is automatically reactivated:
▷ When a new connection is established.
▷ When switching between call parties.
DTMF suffix dialing
DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐
cess to network services or for controlling de‐
vices, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an‐
swering machine. The DTMF code is needed
for this purpose.
1.
"Telephone"
2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
number".
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected
to make a call.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Seite 232
Communication Telephone
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Calling a contact
Symbol Meaning
Contact with one stored phone
number.
Contact with more than one stored
phone number.
Call not possible; mobile phone
without reception or network, or
Service Request is active.
For contacts with one stored phone number:
select the required contact. The connection is
being established.
For contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the required contact and the
phone number. The connection is being estab‐
lished.
Editing a contact
Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1.
Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers
are displayed that were dialed from the vehicle.
The 20 phone numbers dialed last are dis‐
played. The sorting order of the phone num‐
bers depends on the particular mobile phone.
Dialing a number via the instrument
cluster
This is possible if a call is not currently active.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Dialing the number via the iDrive
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry and the phone
number if necessary.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
The deletion of entries depends on your par‐
ticular mobile phone.
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Seite 233
Telephone Communication
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select the contact if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
Received calls
Displaying calls
The 20 calls that were last received are dis‐
played.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Selecting an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
The deletion of entries depends on your par‐
ticular mobile phone.
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select the contact if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
Hands-free system
General information
Calls that are being made on the hands-free
system can be continued on the mobile phone
and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system
automatically switches to the hands-free sys‐
tem.
If the system does not switch over automati‐
cally, follow the instructions on the mobile
phone display; refer also to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
From the hands-free system to the
mobile phone
Calls that are made on the hands-free system
can in some cases be continued on the mobile
phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone
display; refer also to the mobile phone operat‐
ing instructions.
Seite 234
Communication Telephone
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Voice operation
General information
Vehicles equipped with the voice activation
system: operation, refer to page 25.
Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation
system: depending on the equipment, the mo‐
bile phone can be voice operated as described
below.
The list of short commands in the Owner's
Manual does not apply to this type of voice op‐
eration.
The concept
▷ The mobile phone can be operated without
taking your hands from the steering wheel.
▷ In many cases, the entries are accompa‐
nied by announcements or questions.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
operation system.
▷ ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by
the voice operation system.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Say the command.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
›Help‹.
Possible commands are announced.
The digits from zero to nine are recognized.
The digits can be spoken separately or com‐
bined in a sequence to accelerate the entry.
Using alternative commands
The system often recognizes a number of dif‐
ferent commands to run a function; for in‐
stance:
›Dial name‹ or ›Name‹
Example: dialing a phone number
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Dial number‹
The system says: »Please say the number
«.
3. For instance, ›123 456 790‹
The system says: »123 456 790. Con‐
tinue?«.
4. ›Dial‹
The system says: »Dialing number«.
Calling
Dialing a phone number
1.
›Dial number‹
2. Say the phone number.
3. ›Dial‹
Correcting the phone number
The sequence of digits can be deleted after
the system has repeated the digits.
›Correct number‹
The command can be repeated as often as
necessary.
Deleting a phone number
›Delete‹
All digits entered up to that point are deleted.
Seite 235
Telephone Communication
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Redialing
›Redial‹
Voice phone book
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
may be necessary to create your own voice
phone book.
The entries must be entered using voice acti‐
vation and are separate from the memory in
the mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set
up.
Saving an entry
1.
›Save name‹
2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking
duration of approx. 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being
prompted to do so by the system.
4. ›Save‹
Deleting an entry
1.
›Delete name‹
2. Say the name after being prompted to do
so.
3. Confirm the prompt: ›Yes‹
Deleting all entries
1.
›Delete phone book‹
2. Confirm the prompt: ›Yes‹
3. Confirm the prompt again: ›Yes‹
Reading and selecting entries
1.
›Read phonebook‹
2. When the desired entry is read aloud: say ›
Dial number‹
Selecting an entry
1.
›Dial name‹
2. Say the name after being prompted to do
so.
3. Confirm the prompt: ›Yes‹
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob during an announcement.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Notes
Do not use voice operation to initiate an Emer‐
gency Request. In stressful situations, the
voice and vocal pitch can change. This can un‐
necessarily delay the establishment of a tele‐
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 286, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the system. The language for the mobile
phone voice operation is preset and cannot
be changed in the Control Display.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 236
Communication Telephone
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Snap-in adapter
General information
More information on compatible snap-in
adapters that support the functions of the mo‐
bile phone is available at the service center.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Installation position
In the center armrest.
Inserting/removing the snap-in
adapter
1.
Press button 1 and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐
row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐
gages.
3. To remove the snap-in adapter: press but‐
ton 1.
Inserting the mobile phone
1.
Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con‐
nector and from the USB connection of the
mobile phone.
2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mo‐
bile phone up toward the electrical con‐
tacts and press it down until it engages.
The battery is charged beginning with the
radio ready state of the vehicle.
Seite 237
Telephone Communication
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Removing the mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile
phone.
Seite 238
Communication Telephone
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Office
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
At a glance
General information
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text
messages, and e-mails from the mobile phone
can be displayed on the Control Display if the
mobile phone provides compatible support of
these functions and the necessary Bluetooth
standards.
Information about which mobile phones sup‐
port the Office functions can be found at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited num‐
ber of compatible mobile phones is available
for Office.
Contents are only displayed in full length when
the vehicle is stationary.
The mobile phone has read-access only.
Do not use Office while driving
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other road users, never at‐
tempt to use the controls or enter information
unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Requirements
▷ A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, data access must be confirmed on
the mobile phone.
▷ The time, time zone, and date, refer to
page 78, are correctly set on the Control
Display and on the mobile phone, for in‐
stance to correctly display appointments.
▷ Office is activated, refer to page 227.
Updating
Data are updated every time the mobile phone
is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en‐
tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be up‐
dated separately.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
"Notes" or "Reminders"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Update data"
Mobile phone data are transmitted again to
the vehicle.
Office information
The number of unread messages and active
tasks as well as the upcoming appointments
are displayed.
1.
"Office"
2. "Current office"
3. Select the desired entry to display details.
Seite 239
Office Communication
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Contacts
Note
Equipment version with the mobile phone
preparation package.
At a glance
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐
tinations for navigation and the phone num‐
bers can be dialed.
Displaying contacts
General information
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered, refer to page 23.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Symbol Storage location
No sym‐
bol
In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone.
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select the phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
When a contact is edited, the changes are not
stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the en‐
try is stored in the vehicle.
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
When contacts from the mobile phone are
used, the address may need to be matched
to the navigation data contained in the ve‐
hicle. In this case:
Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
Seite 240
Communication Office
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight
the address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy
of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone.
New contact
General information
A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers,
2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter‐
net address.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "New contact"
5. The entry fields are still filled with the pre‐
vious entries: "Delete input fields"
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type.
8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system: enter the address. Only addresses
contained in the navigation data in the ve‐
hicle can be entered. This ensures that
destination guidance is possible for all ad‐
dresses.
If necessary, "Accept address".
9. "Store contact in vehicle"
Contact types
Various contact types can be assigned to
phone numbers and addresses.
Symbol Meaning
Home phone number.
Business phone number.
Mobile phone number.
Other phone number.
Home address.
Business address.
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at
the top of the contact list.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. "Home"
4. Create a contact.
5. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting the sorting order of the
names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored
on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the
names may differ from the selected sorting or‐
der.
Seite 241
Office Communication
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Show contact pictures
Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in
the vehicle when the mobile phone is con‐
nected to the vehicle. The number of transmit‐
ted pictures depends on the mobile phone.
The mobile phone must support this function.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. "Show images"
Display of all contact pictures is activated or
deactivated.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
cannot be deleted.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
6. If necessary. "Yes"
Messages
General information
Whether or not text messages and e-mails
from the mobile phone are displayed depends
on whether transmission from the mobile
phone to the vehicle is supported. Text mes‐
sages and e-mails may not be supported by
the service provider, or the function may need
to be enabled separately. After the mobile
phone is first paired, transmission may take
several minutes. Messages are only displayed
in full length when the vehicle is stationary.
Messages from the additional telephone are
not transmitted.
Displaying messages
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
A symbol identifies the type of message.
Symbol Message type
Text messages.
My Info
Message from the Concierge serv‐
ice.
E-mail from mobile phone.
Filtering the message list
The message list can be filtered if more than
one type of message exists.
1.
"Filter:"
2. Select the type of message.
▷ "All"
All messages are displayed.
▷ "E-mail"
Only e-mails from the mobile phone
are displayed.
▷ "Service message"
Only messages from the BMW Assist
Concierge service and My Info are dis‐
played.
▷ "Text message"
Only text messages from the mobile
phone are displayed.
Seite 242
Communication Office
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Deleting messages
Messages from the Concierge service and
My Info can be deleted.
Delete a message:
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete message"
Delete all messages:
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all messages" or "Delete service
messages"
Text messages
Calling the sender of a text message
1.
Select the desired message.
2. Select the symbol.
Saving the sender in the contacts
1.
Highlight the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 246.
Reading the text message out loud
Read the text message out loud, refer to
page 246.
My Info
Selecting additional functions
Additional functions are available when a mes‐
sage is selected.
Sym‐
bol
Function
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
"Call"
If the message contains a number,
the connection is established.
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired
number from the list. The connec‐
tion is established.
Message from the Concierge service
Storing an address
1.
Select the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting additional functions
Additional functions are available when a mes‐
sage is selected.
Sym‐
bol
Function
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
"Call"
If the message contains a number,
the connection is established.
Seite 243
Office Communication
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Sym‐
bol
Function
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired
number from the list. The connec‐
tion is established.
"Further information"
Display additional information.
E-mail
Displaying e-mails
1.
"Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired e-mail.
Displaying e-mail contacts
If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are
transmitted by the mobile phone, this informa‐
tion is displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con‐
tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con‐
tact to display details.
If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the
contacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 246.
Deactivating the full display
When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e-
mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This
may result in charges.
1.
"Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Fully download e-mails"
Only a part of the e-mail from the mobile
phone is loaded into the vehicle.
Reading the e-mail out loud
Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 246.
Calendar
Display the calendar
Appointments during the last 20 days and the
next 50 days can be displayed.
1.
"Office"
2. "Calendar"
The appointments on the current day are
displayed.
Selecting the calendar day
1.
Select the date.
2. Select the desired day or date.
▷ "Next day"
▷ "Date:"
▷ "Previous day"
▷ "Today"
Display the appointment
1.
Select the desired appointment.
2. Scroll through the appointment if neces‐
sary:
▷ Turn the controller.
Seite 244
Communication Office
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 246.
Reading the appointment out loud
Read the appointment out loud, refer to
page 246.
Tasks
Displaying the task list
Display tasks that are due within the next
90 days.
1.
"Office"
2. "Tasks"
Sorting the task list
1.
Select the header in the task list.
2. Select the sorting criterion:
▷ "Priority (!)"
▷ "Subject"
▷ "Due date"
Displaying the task
1.
Select the desired task.
2. Scroll in the task if necessary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 246.
Reading the task out loud
Read the task out loud, refer to page 246.
Notes
Displaying notes
1.
"Office"
2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying the note
1.
Select the desired note.
2. Scroll in the note if necessary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 246.
Reading the note out loud
Read the note out loud, refer to page 246.
Seite 245
Office Communication
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Reminders
Displaying reminders
Reminders of pending appointments and tasks
are displayed. After an appointment or after a
task is due, the reminder is no longer dis‐
played.
1. "Office"
2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The corresponding appointment or the task
are displayed.
Using contact data
At a glance
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
selected.
Displaying contact or selecting phone
number
1.
"Use contact data"
2. Display the contact or select the phone
number:
▷ Select the contact to display contact
details.
▷ Select the phone number to establish a
connection directly.
Storing contact data
1.
"Use contact data"
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐
dress.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading out loud
Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries,
tasks, and notes can be read out loud.
1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note.
2. Select the symbol.
The following options are available during
reading:
▷ "Pause"
Interrupt reading. Select again to restart
reading.
▷ "Back to beginning"
Start reading the message again from the
beginning.
▷ Select the symbol.
Go back one paragraph.
▷ Select the symbol.
Skip a paragraph.
▷ To end reading, turn the controller to the
left.
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 226.
Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or
e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis‐
played.
▷ The mobile phone is not capable of the
missing function or is not connected cor‐
rectly.
▷ The Office function is deactivated.
▷ The mobile phone is connected as an addi‐
tional phone.
▷ Appointments are older than 20 days or
are more than 50 days in the future.
▷ The tasks have been marked as completed
or have a due date that lies more than
90 days in the future.
Seite 246
Communication Office
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Depending on the number of stored ap‐
pointments, task notes, and messages in
the mobile phone, not all are displayed in
the vehicle.
Not all appointments and tasks from the mo‐
bile phone are displayed at the right time?
▷ The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly
set on the Control Display and mobile
phone.
The e-mail attachment is not displayed.
▷ E-mails are transmitted without an attach‐
ment.
Entries are not displayed in full length.
▷ Text were already transmitted from the
mobile phone in a shortened form.
▷ Synchronization between the mobile
phone and vehicle may take several mi‐
nutes.
The contact pictures are not being displayed?
▷ Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in
the vehicle.
The E-mail is displayed with a delay?
▷ Check the e-mail settings on the telephone
and adjust if necessary.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available,
please contact the hotline or service center.
Seite 247
Office Communication
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Contacts
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Note
Equipment version without the mobile phone
preparation package.
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐
tinations for navigation and the phone num‐
bers can be dialed.
New contact
1.
"Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the pre‐
vious entries: "Delete input fields"
4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
5. Enter the text, refer to page 23.
In vehicles equipped with a navigation sys‐
tem: it is only possible to enter addresses
that are contained in the vehicle navigation
data. This ensures that destination guid‐
ance is possible for all addresses.
6. If necessary, "Store".
7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at
the top of the contact list.
1.
"Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
My contacts
General information
List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.
Displaying contacts
1.
"Contacts"
Seite 248
Communication Contacts
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
2. "My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered, refer to page 23.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Symbol Storage location
No sym‐
bol
In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone.
Dialing a phone number
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. Select the phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. Move the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"
If a contact from the mobile phone is edited,
the changes are not stored on the mobile
phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the ve‐
hicle, and only this copy is displayed. Under
certain circumstances, a contact entry with the
same name is created.
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1.
Select the desired contact and highlight
the address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
Selecting the sorting order of the
names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1.
"My contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported via
Personal Profile, refer to page 30.
Seite 249
Contacts Communication
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Deleting contacts
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
Seite 250
Communication Contacts
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
ConnectedDrive
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
TeleService
General information
TeleService supports communication with
your service center.
▷ Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the service center.
In this way, the service center can plan its
work in advance. This shortens the dura‐
tion of the service appointment.
▷ In the event of a breakdown, data on the
vehicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance.
▷ The service varies by country.
▷ Connection costs may ensue.
▷ Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
If BMW Assist is not activated, a mobile
phone that has been recommended by
BMW for TeleService and that is config‐
ured for mobile data communication must
be connected with the vehicle.
▷ Wireless reception is available.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Using TeleService
TeleService is typically activated in the vehicle.
Even if TeleService is not active, a voice con‐
tact to Roadside Assistance is still possible.
To continue using or to deactivate the serv‐
ices, please contact your service partner or the
BMW customer hotline.
Concierge service
General information
The Concierge service offers information on
events, gas stations, and hotels, and provides
phone numbers and addresses. Hotels can be
booked directly using the Concierge service.
The Concierge service is part of the optional
Convenience Plan.
Starting the Concierge service
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established with the
Concierge service. Phone numbers and ad‐
dresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
Messages
Information on messages, refer to page 242.
Seite 251
ConnectedDrive Communication
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Roadside Assistance
At a glance
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
a Check Control message, refer to page 76.
Starting Roadside Assistance without
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a
connection is established to Roadside As‐
sistance.
Starting Roadside Assistance with
TeleService
General information
In vehicles equipped with TeleService, support
is first offered by TeleService Diagnosis and
then, if necessary, by TeleService Help.
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
3. "Start service"
TeleService Diagnosis
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are
transmitted automatically.
After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐
nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab‐
lished.
BMW Online
At a glance
A business search can be opened via BMW
Online.
License conditions
This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trade‐
mark of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and
other countries.
This software is based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
▷ Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
▷ The date setting on the Control Display is
current.
▷ The vehicle is located within wireless net‐
work coverage.
Seite 252
Communication ConnectedDrive
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Starting BMW Online
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Online"
3. If necessary, "OK".
The BMW Online home page is displayed.
Operating BMW Online
To start a search:
▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element.
▷ Press the controller to display an element.
Opening the start page
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"
Loading a new page
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Cancel
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
At a glance
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicle not equipped with TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connec‐
tion is established to Customer Relations.
Vehicle equipped with TeleService
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
Service Request
At a glance
Sends information to your service partner to
request the arrangement of a service appoint‐
ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐
ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
partner will establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Request"
Seite 253
ConnectedDrive Communication
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
3. "Start service"
A Service Request can be started via a Check
Control message, refer to page 76.
Automatic Service Request
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your serv‐
ice partner prior to the service deadline. If pos‐
sible, the service partner will contact you and a
service appointment can be arranged.
To check when your service partner was noti‐
fied:
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
TeleService Report
Transmits technical data when needed from
your vehicle to BMW at regular intervals; these
are evaluated for the continued development
of BMW products.
TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that
meet certain technical conditions and that
have a current ConnectedDrive subscription; it
is free of charge.
Neither personal nor position data are trans‐
mitted.
To check when your service partner was noti‐
fied:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Options"
4. "Last Teleservice Info"
Services status
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Status"
3. "Available services"
Updating BMW Assist
Manual update of TeleService.
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Status"
3. "Update BMW Assist"
Seite 254
Communication ConnectedDrive
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Data transfer
During the updating of BMW services, display
the status of the data transfer.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Apps
At a glance
Certain software applications of a suitable mo‐
bile phone can be integrated in the vehicle.
These software applications are displayed on
the Control Display.
They are operated via iDrive.
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is suitable.
▷ The mobile phone operating system sup‐
ports the software applications of Apps.
▷ Software applications are installed on the
mobile phone and ready to use.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
Any additionally incurred costs are not a
part of Apps.
▷ Use only BMW approved software applica‐
tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc‐
tions.
Information about suitable mobile phones,
available software applications and their instal‐
lation can be found at www.bmw.com/connec‐
tivity or at the service center.
Create the entries.
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu‐
pants and other road users may be put in dan‐
ger because of the distraction from driving.
For reasons of safety, some software applica‐
tions are usable only while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.◀
Operating Apps
1. Connect the mobile phone via the snap-in
adapter or via the USB audio interface.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. Select the desired software application.
Displaying status
Information about the currently available soft‐
ware applications can be displayed.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW apps"
Notes
▷ The ranges of Apps that can be displayed
on the Control Display depend on the
range of installed software applications on
the mobile phone.
▷ The data transmission of the software ap‐
plications from the mobile phone to the ve‐
hicle can last some time. Some software
applications depend on the speed of the
available Internet connection of the mobile
phone.
▷ Some mobile phones cannot simultane‐
ously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands-
free system.
If necessary, restart the software applica‐
tion on the mobile phone after a phone
conversation.
Seite 255
ConnectedDrive Communication
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
General information
Refuel promptly
At the latest, refuel at a range below
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Notes
Switch off the engine before refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu‐
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the
tank and a message will be displayed.◀
Observe when handling fuel
▷ Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations
when handling fuel.
▷ Do not carry any spare fuel containers in
your vehicle. They can develop a leak and
cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until
you clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be
closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap
can be released manually:
1.
Open the right-hand side panel in the
cargo area.
Seite 258
Mobility Refueling
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
2. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.
Observe the following when
refueling
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature pump shutoff.
▷ Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov‐
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise,
escaping fuel may harm the environment or
damage the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Follow the safety instructions provided at
gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of
personal injury and property damage.◀
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 22.5 US gallons/85 liters, including the
reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 US gallons/
8 liters.
X6 xDrive50i: reserve capacity of approx.
3.2 gallons/12 liters.
Seite 259
Refueling Mobility
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Fuel
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Fuel recommendation
Gasoline
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel
pump as containing metals.
Only refuel with lead-free gasoline with‐
out metal additives
Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline
with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron;
otherwise, the catalytic converter and other
components will be permanently damaged.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling.
The ethanol should fulfill the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: always adhere to the currently applicable
standard.
Do not refuel with ethanol E85
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as
this would damage the engine and fuel supply
system.◀
The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you
can refuel with different gasoline qualities.
Gasoline quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not fill up with fuel below the speci‐
fied minimum quality; otherwise, the engine
may not run properly.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Minimum fuel grade
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐
ers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Seite 260
Mobility Fuel
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Seite 261
Fuel Mobility
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres‐
sure.
Checking the pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle
has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the
tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is
higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it if necessary, even in the compact
wheel: usually twice monthly or before em‐
barking on a long trip. If you fail to observe this
precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐
correct tire pressures, a condition that may not
only compromise your vehicle's driving stabil‐
ity, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of
an accident.
Do not drive with depressurized or flat tires,
except for run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously
impair your vehicle's handling and braking re‐
sponse. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead
to a loss of control over the vehicle.◀
After adjusting the tire inflation pressure, reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 90, or
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 88.
Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct infla‐
tion pressures for the specified tire sizes at
ambient temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes
approved and tire brands recommended by
BMW; a list of these is available from your
service center.
For correct identification of the right tire infla‐
tion pressures, observe the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum allowable driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures for driving up
to 100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/
160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
These tire inflation pressures can also be
found on the driver's side door pillar when the
driver's door is open.
Seite 262
Mobility Wheels and tires
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed
The maximum permissible speed for these tire
pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h. Do not ex‐
ceed this speed; otherwise, tire damage and
accidents may occur.◀
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
Adjust the tire inflation pressures
To drive at maximum speeds in excess of
100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re‐
spective tire inflation pressures listed on the
following pages in the column for traveling
speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or
160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
dents could occur.◀
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could
occur.
Tire inflation pressure X6 xDrive35i
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds of up to
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds including
those exceeding 100 mph/
160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the ta‐
ble are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC
255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL RSC
2.2/32 2.4/35 2.5/36 3.0/44
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC
2.2/32
-
-
2.2/32
2.5/36
-
-
2.6/38
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC
2.2/32
-
-
2.2/32
2.5/36
-
-
2.5/36
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC
2.2/32
-
-
2.3/33
2.6/38
-
-
2.7/39
Seite 263
Wheels and tires Mobility
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL
RSC
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL
RSC
2.2/32
-
-
2.2/32
2.5/36
-
-
2.7/39
Compact wheel:
T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M
Speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressures for X6 xDrive50i
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds of up to
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds including
those exceeding 100 mph/
160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the ta‐
ble are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC
255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL RSC
2.3/33 2.5/36 2.8/41 3.0/44
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC
2.5/36
-
-
2.5/36
2.9/42
-
-
2.9/42
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC
2.5/36
-
-
2.5/36
3.0/44
-
-
3.0/44
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC
2.5/36
-
-
2.5/36
3.1/45
-
-
3.1/45
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL
RSC
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL
RSC
2.5/36
-
-
2.5/36
3.0/44
-
-
3.0/44
Compact wheel:
T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M
Speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Seite 264
Mobility Wheels and tires
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the
tire makes it easier to identify and choose the
right tires.
Tire size
Example: 255/55 R 19 107 V
255: nominal width in mm
55: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
19: rim diameter in inches
107: load rating, not for ZR tires
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
DOT xxxx xxx 2313
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
2313: tire age
Tire age
The tire manufacturing date is contained in the
tire identification mark: DOT ... 2313 means
that the tire was manufactured in the
week 23 of 2013.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires af‐
ter 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
Conform to Federal Safety Requirements
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.◀
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
ing habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Seite 265
Wheels and tires Mobility
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
page 268.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than
summer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Notes
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Seite 266
Mobility Wheels and tires
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by driving over curbs,
road damage and similar situations.
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; other‐
wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Otherwise, tire damage can present a life-
threatening hazard to vehicle occupants and
other road users.◀
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the right wheel and tire combi‐
nation and rim version for your vehicle can be
obtained from the service center.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body con‐
tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐
uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore
cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐
cle if they are mounted.◀
Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire
Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the
Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect
a flat tire, refer to page 90. Your service center
will be glad to advise you.
Seite 267
Wheels and tires Mobility
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do
provide better winter traction than summer
tires, they do not provide the same level of per‐
formance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field
of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire
specialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for
the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac‐
cidents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires.
Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against swapping wheels between the front
and rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Rotating the tires is not permissible when us‐
ing different types of tires.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
Seite 268
Mobility Wheels and tires
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a pressure loss.
Driving with a damaged tire:
▷ Flat Tire Monitor FTM, refer to page 88
▷ Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to
page 90
Snow chains
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your service center for
more information.
Use only in pairs on rear wheels of size
255/50 R 19.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow
chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument
might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, it can be bene‐
ficial to temporarily activate DTC, refer to
page 97.
Seite 269
Wheels and tires Mobility
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Filler neck for the washer fluid for the
headlamp and window washer system 66
2 Engine oil filler neck 272
3 Starting aid terminal 288
4 Coolant expansion tank 273
Hood
Opening the hood
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
Seite 270
Mobility Engine compartment
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
1. Pull the lever.
2. Press the release handle and open the
hood.
Closing the hood
Drop the hood from a height of ap‐
prox. 16 in/40 cm. It must be clearly heard to
engage.
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
mediately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Engine oil
General information
Engine oil consumption depends on the driv‐
ing style and the conditions of use. A highly
sporty driving style, for example, results in
considerably higher engine oil consumption.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
Checking the engine oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic engine
oil level check.
Requirements
▷ The engine must be running and warm af‐
ter the vehicle has been driven for at least
6.2 miles/10 km.
▷ The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a
level roadway.
Displaying the oil level
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages
▷ "Engine oil level OK"
Seite 271
Engine compartment Mobility
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ "Measurement not possible at this time."
▷ "Measuring engine oil level..."
Duration with the engine running: ap‐
prox. 3 minutes.
Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.
If engine oil was added, it may take up to
30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.
▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 li‐
ter of engine oil at the next opportunity, re‐
fer also to Adding engine oil below.
▷ "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked."
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immedi‐
ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en‐
gine damage.◀
▷ "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked." Do not add engine oil. It is possi‐
ble to continue driving. Note the newly cal‐
culated remaining mileage until the next oil
service, refer to page 74. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Filler neck
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter
of oil only after the corresponding message
appears on the Control Display.
Add oil promptly
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
otherwise, engine damage could result.◀
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types for refilling
Notes
No oil additives
Do not use oil additives as these may
cause engine damage.◀
Viscosity classes of engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE vis‐
cosity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or
5W-30, or malfunctions or engine damage may
occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Due to national regulations, some oil types are
not available in every country.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Further information on approved oil types can
be obtained from the service center.
Seite 272
Mobility Engine compartment
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
specification can be used:
Gasoline engine
API SM or a higher quality standard
Oil change
An oil change should be carried out by the
service center only.
Coolant
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while
the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant
may cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for your vehicle. Ask your service cen‐
ter for suitable additives.
Checking the coolant level
1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐
wise slightly to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape; then continue turning
to open.
3. The filling level indicator 1 in the filler neck
indicates the coolant level. The coolant
level is correct if it is between the arrows of
the respective reservoir label 2.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the appropriate environ‐
mental protection regulations when dis‐
posing of coolant additives.
Seite 273
Engine compartment Mobility
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
BMW Maintenance System
The maintenance system provides information
on required maintenance measures and thus
provides support in maintaining road safety
and the operational reliability of the vehicle.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
mines the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Details on the service requirements, refer to
page 74, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
On the Control Display, the remaining distan‐
ces and times for selected maintenance re‐
quirements and any legally required deadlines
can be displayed individually, refer to page 74.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control.
Your service center will read out this data and
suggest the right array of service procedures
for your vehicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control that you used most recently.
Setting the correct date
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 78; otherwise, the effectiveness of
CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.◀
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
Seite 274
Mobility Maintenance
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Maintenance and repair should be performed
by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐
ular maintenance procedures recorded in the
vehicle's Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐
nance.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis may
only be used by the service center, by work‐
shops that operate according to the specifica‐
tions of the vehicle manufacturer with appro‐
priately trained personnel, and by other
authorized persons. Otherwise, its use may
lead to vehicle malfunctions.◀
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Display of the previously described
malfunctions on Canadian models.
Fuel cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tight‐
ened, the OBD system may conclude
that fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then
tightened, the display should go out in a short
time.
Seite 275
Maintenance Mobility
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Tool kit
The tool kit is stowed under the cargo floor
panel in the cargo area.
Wiper blade replacement
Do not fold down the wipers without
wiper blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades
have not been installed; this may damage the
windshield.◀
Front
1. Fold up the wiper arm.
2. Press the release button on the wiper arm,
see arrow 1.
3. Pull off the wiper blade toward the front,
see arrow 2.
Lamp and bulb replacement
Notes
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with
them or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement
bulbs at the service center.
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system,
you should always switch off the lights af‐
fected to prevent short circuits.
Seite 276
Mobility Replacing components
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is
carried out improperly.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes LED
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu‐
cent lenses serve as the light source for many
of the controls, displays and other equipment
in your vehicle.
These light-emitting diodes, which operate us‐
ing a concept similar to that applied in conven‐
tional lasers, are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlamps in cool or humid weather. When
you drive with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlamps do not need to be changed.
If the condensation in the headlamps does not
evaporate after trips with the lights switched
on, and the amount of moisture in the head‐
lamps increases, for example if water droplets
form, have them checked by your service cen‐
ter.
Changing the lamps
Xenon headlamps
Notes
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lamps on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog
lamps and continue the trip with great care.
Comply with local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is
carried out improperly.◀
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 276.
Parking lamps, roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lights
The illustration shows the left side of the en‐
gine compartment.
Seite 277
Replacing components Mobility
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
35-watt bulb, H8
1. Turn the cover to the left and remove.
2. Left side of vehicle: rotate the bulb holder
to the right, see arrow, and remove.
Right side of vehicle: rotate the bulb holder
to the left and remove.
3. Disconnect plug and replace bulb.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Side marker lamps
The illustration shows the left side of the en‐
gine compartment.
5-watt bulb, WY5W XLL
1.
Rotate the bulb holder to the left and re‐
move.
2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and re‐
place.
3. Install in the reverse order.
LED headlamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 276.
With LED headlamps, the following lamps are
designed with LED technology:
▷ Low beams/high beams
▷ Adaptive Light Control
▷ Parking and roadside parking lamps
▷ Daytime running lights.
▷ Side marker lights.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Turn signals, front
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 276.
The illustration shows the left side of the en‐
gine compartment.
24-watt bulb, PY24W
1.
Rotate bulb holder to the left and remove it
along with the bulb.
2. Rotate the bulb to the right along with the
socket and replace.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Fog lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 276.
Seite 278
Mobility Replacing components
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Tail lamps
▷ Turn signal, backup lamp: 21-watt bulb,
H21W.
▷ Brake lamp, brake force display: 21-watt
bulb, P21W
▷ Tail lamp: LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of
a malfunction.
Arrangement of tail lamps
1 Tail lamps
2 Brake force display
3 Brake lamp
4 Backup lamp
5 Turn signal
Brake lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 276.
1.
Open the side panel in the cargo area.
2. Remove the first aid kit and warning trian‐
gle if necessary.
3. Rotate the relevant bulb socket to the left
and remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and re‐
placement.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 276.
1.
Open the side panel in the cargo area.
2. Remove the first aid kit and warning trian‐
gle if necessary.
3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and
replace.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Backup lamp
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 276.
1.
Open the side panel in the cargo area.
2. Remove the first aid kit and warning trian‐
gle if necessary.
Seite 279
Replacing components Mobility
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and
replace.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Brake force display
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 276.
1.
Carefully remove the cover in the tailgate
panel with a screwdriver.
2. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and re‐
move.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and re‐
placement.
4. Insert the bulb socket in the tailgate and
engage it.
5. Replace the cover.
License plate lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 276.
These lamps are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Center brake lamp
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 276.
This lamp uses LED technology for operation.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Changing wheels
Notes
Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, re‐
fer to page 268, as standard equipment.
They do not need to be replaced immediately
in the event of a puncture.
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-
flat tires for your own safety.
Do not rotate the front wheels to the rear or
vice versa, as otherwise the handling charac‐
teristics will be negatively affected.
Suitable tools for changing the wheels are
available from the service center as an acces‐
sory.
Seite 280
Mobility Replacing components
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated in the positions shown.
Compact wheel
Safety precautions in the event of a flat
tire or wheel change
Park the vehicle as far as possible from pass‐
ing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the
hazard warning system.
Set the parking brake and engage transmis‐
sion position P.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehi‐
cle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as behind
a guardrail.
If a warning triangle or portable hazard warning
lamp is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi‐
cle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regu‐
lations.
Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface
which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack
could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the
vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as
snow, ice, tiles, etc.
Position the jack on a firm support surface.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as
a support base for the jack, as this would pre‐
vent it from extending to its full support height
and reduce its load-carrying capacity.
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under
the vehicle, and never start the engine while it
is supported by the jack.◀
What you will need
To avoid rattling noises later on, note the posi‐
tions of the tools before removing them, then
return them to their initial positions after com‐
pleting work.
The tools are located in the mount under the
cargo floor cover.
1 Vehicle jack
2 Vehicle jack crank
3 Lug bolts wrench
Removing compact wheel
The compact wheel is located in the cargo area
under the cargo floor panel.
1.
Remove the tool mount.
2. Release the wing nut 1.
3. Remove the washer 2 laterally.
4. Remove the compact wheel.
Seite 281
Replacing components Mobility
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Preparing wheel change
1. Observe the safety precautions above.
2. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking up vehicle
1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking
point closest to the wheel so that the entire
surface of the jack base rests on the
ground perpendicularly beneath the jack‐
ing point.
The vehicle jack is designed for
changing wheels only.
The vehicle jack is designed for changing
wheels only. Do not attempt to raise an‐
other vehicle model with it or to raise any
load of any kind. To do so could cause ac‐
cidents and personal injury.◀
2.
Guide the jack head into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point when cranking
up, refer to illustration detail.
3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
changing is raised from the ground.
Mounting a wheel
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Also clean the lug bolts.
3. Position the new wheel or compact wheel.
Secure the wheel by screwing at least two
lug bolts into opposite bolt holes.
When you mount wheels other than Genu‐
ine BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug
bolts may also be required.
4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten
all the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack
from beneath the vehicle.
After mounting
1.
Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
Checking that the lug bolts are tight
To ensure safety, always have the lug
bolts checked with a calibrated torque
wrench as soon as possible to ensure that
they are tightened to the specified torque.
Otherwise, incorrectly tightened lug bolts
are a hidden safety risk. The tightening tor‐
que equals 101 lb ft/140 Nm.◀
2. Stow the defective wheel in the cargo area.
The defective wheel cannot be stored un‐
der the cargo floor cover due to its size.
3. Check and correct the tire inflation pres‐
sure at the earliest opportunity.
4. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 88, or reset the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor, refer to page 90.
5. Replace the damaged tire as soon as pos‐
sible and have the new wheel/tire bal‐
anced.
Seite 282
Mobility Replacing components
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Driving with compact wheel
Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Drive conservatively and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Otherwise, changes
in the driving characteristics could result, for
example reduced track stability on braking, ex‐
tended braking distance, and altered self-
steering characteristics in the limit range. In
conjunction with winter tires, these character‐
istics are more pronounced.◀
Only mount one compact wheel
Only one compact wheel may be
mounted. Restore the wheels and tires to their
original size as quickly as possible. Failure to
do so is a safety risk.◀
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you
on questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service cen‐
ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not connect the charger to the socket
Do not connect the battery charger to
the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory
as this could damage the battery.◀
General information
Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged
to achieve the full battery life.
It may be necessary to charge the battery in
the following cases:
▷ When the vehicle is frequently used to
drive short distances.
▷ When the vehicle has not been driven for
more than one month.
Starting aid terminals
Only charge using the starting aid terminals,
refer to page 288, in the engine compartment
while the engine is switched off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again, refer to page 50.
▷ Time: update, refer to page 78.
▷ Date: update, refer to page 78.
▷ Radio station: save again, refer to
page 182.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the navigation
system to be operational.
▷ Glass sunroof: it may only be possible to
tilt the roof. Have the system initialized by
the service center.
▷ Digital compass: recalibrate, refer to
page 131.
Seite 283
Replacing components Mobility
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ Active steering: the system automatically
initializes for a short time as you drive. Dur‐
ing this time, the system is deactivated, re‐
fer to page 101.
▷ xDrive: the system automatically initializes
as you drive. During this time, indicator
lamps light up. If the lamps do not disap‐
pear during the current trip, have the sys‐
tem checked.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
tute of another color or amperage rating; this
could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
In interior
The fuses are located in the front passenger
footwell on the underside of the instrument
cluster.
1. Unscrew screws, refer to arrows, of foot‐
well trim panel.
2. Lay the trim panel in the footwell.
3. Release the screw, arrow 1, and fold the
fuse carrier down, arrow 2.
4. Replace the fuse concerned.
5. Installation is carried out in the reverse or‐
der of removal. Ensure correct and secure
attachment of the footwell trim panel in the
process.
Seite 284
Mobility Replacing components
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
In cargo area
Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo
area.
Seite 285
Replacing components Mobility
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Hazard warning flashers
The button for the hazard warning system is
located on the center console.
Emergency Request
Requirements
▷ Equipment version with full preparation
package mobile phone.
An Emergency Request can be made, even
if no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐
hicle.
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
▷ Radio readiness is switched on.
▷ The BMW Assist system is logged in to a
wireless communications network sup‐
ported by BMW Assist.
▷ The Assist system is operable.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐
able conditions.◀
Service contract
▷ After your contract with BMW Assist has
expired, the BMW Assist system can be
deactivated by the service center without
you having to visit a workshop.
After deactivation, an Emergency Request
is no longer possible.
▷ Under certain circumstances, the system
can be reactivated by a service center after
you sign a new contract.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1.
Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the circumstances allow this, remain in
the vehicle until the connection has been
established.
▷ The LED flashes if the connection to the
BMW Assist Response Center has been
established.
Seite 286
Mobility Breakdown assistance
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Once the BMW Response Center has re‐
ceived your Emergency Request, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle
if it can be established, are transmitted to
the BMW Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Re‐
sponse Center cannot be heard on the
hands-free system, the hands-free system
may be malfunctioning. However, the
BMW Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 252,
phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a
connection to Roadside Assistance can be es‐
tablished directly.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the cargo
area.
Open the left side panel and press the tab to
release the fastening.
First aid kit
The first aid kit is located in a storage compart‐
ment on the right side in the cargo area.
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any items promptly.
Jump-starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐
jury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running.◀
Seite 287
Breakdown assistance Mobility
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐
mately the same capacitance in Ah. This
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there
is a danger of shorting.◀
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
from sparking.◀
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐
tive terminal. Open the cover in the direction of
the arrow.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
negative terminal.
Connecting jumper cables
1.
Fold open the cover of the BMW starting-
aid terminal. To do so, pull the tab.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the other end of the cable to the
positive terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding starting aid terminal of the
vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of the vehicle providing as‐
sistance.
5. Attach the other end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
Seite 288
Mobility Breakdown assistance
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.◀
No additional passengers
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.◀
Transporting your vehicle
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Therefore, contact a service center in the
event of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a load‐
ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐
cur.◀
Tow truck
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for
maneuvering the vehicle only.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Light towing vehicle
Your vehicle must not be lighter than the
vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be
possible to control vehicle response.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Towing methods when towing other
vehicles
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is attached offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
Seite 289
Breakdown assistance Mobility
289
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is
secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW.
It is stored with the tool kit under the cargo
floor cover in the cargo area, refer to page 276.
Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the
vehicle can occur.◀
Screw thread
Left/right cover in the bumper: press on the ar‐
row symbol on the cover.
Front
Rear
Tow-starting
Note
Do not tow-start your vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Seite 290
Mobility Breakdown assistance
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Care
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Car washes
Notes
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃.
Holding them too close or using excessively
high pressures or temperatures can cause
damage or preliminary damage that may then
lead to long-term damage.
Follow the operating instructions for the high-
pressure washer.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, for
Park Distance Control or the backup camera,
for instance, for extended periods of time and
only from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀
Regularly remove foreign bodies, such as
leaves, from the area below the windshield
when the hood is open.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the
vehicle.
Washing in automatic car washes
Give preference to cloth car washes or those
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
Notes
Note the following:
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate rain sensor, refer to page 66, to
prevent unintentional wiper action.
▷ Remove additional attachments, for in‐
stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if
there is a risk that these may be damaged.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle is able to roll if the following steps
are taken.
1.
Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Deactivating Automatic Hold, refer to
page 62.
5. Switch the engine off.
6. Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock so that the vehicle can roll.
Transmission position P will be engaged:
▷ Automatically after approx. 30 minutes.
Seite 291
Care Mobility
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
▷ When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock.
Mixed tires
Note the vehicle width
Before driving into a car wash, make sure
that the vehicle width is not too large for the
car wash, as otherwise the vehicle and the car
wash could be damaged.◀
Headlamps
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
caustic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due
to insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Fully remove any residue from the windows to
prevent obstruction of view from streaking,
wiping noises, and wiper wear.
Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with high air pollution or natural contami‐
nants, such as tree resin or pollen, can have an
impact on the vehicle paint. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these in‐
fluences.
Immediately remove aggressive substances,
such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird drop‐
pings, to prevent damage to or discoloration of
the paintwork.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every
two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
dust and dirt are more noticeable.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use
a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita‐
ble interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Seite 292
Mobility Care
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the seat
covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are
closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the wheels on the vehicle, only
use a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH value
of 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaners or a
steam jet hotter than 140 ℉/60 ℃; otherwise,
damage may result. Adhere to the manufac‐
turer instructions.
Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaners may
destroy the protective coating of neighboring
components such as the brake disc.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Aluminum running boards
A rust film on the aluminum running boards
can be removed with a special cleaning agent.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber
cleansers.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any
silicon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Headliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Moisten the cloth lightly with water if neces‐
sary.
Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
to surface damage.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
No chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Seite 293
Care Mobility
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again when they are returned after being
removed, such as for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passen‐
ger compartment for cleaning.
When returning the floor mats, secure them
again to prevent slipping.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors or cameras, use a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an anti-static micro‐
fiber cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household
cleansers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the
unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.
Seite 294
Mobility Care
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Seite 295
Care Mobility
295
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and
an index that will quickly take you to the
information you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
Dimensions
BMW X6
Width with mirrors inches/mm 86.4/2,195
Width without mirrors inches/mm 78.1/1,930
Height inches/mm 66.5/1,690
Opening height of tailgate inches/mm 90.0/2,287
Length inches/mm 192.0/4,877
Wheelbase inches/mm 115.5/2,933
Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 42.0/12.8
With mixed tires, the vehicle width may exceed the specified dimensions.
Weights
X6 xDrive35i X6 xDrive50i
Approved gross vehicle
weight
lbs/kg 6,008/2,725 6,250/2,835
Load lbs/kg 937/425 937/425
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,800/1,270 3,020/1,370
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,263/1,480 3,351/1,520
Approved roof load ca‐
pacity
lbs/kg 220/100 220/100
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liter
25.6-59.7/570‐
1,450
25.6-59.7/570-1,
450
Seite 298
Reference Technical data
298
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters Approx. 22.4/85 Fuel specifications, refer to
page 260
Including reserve of
X6 xDrive35i US gal/liters Approx. 2.1/8
X6 xDrive50i US gal/liters approx. 3.2/12
Seite 299
Technical data Reference
299
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Short commands for voice activation
system
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
General information
Instructions for voice activation system, refer
to page 25.
To have the available spoken instructions read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹
The following short commands apply to vehi‐
cles equipped with a voice activation system.
They have no function in vehicles in which only
the mobile phone is operated using the voice.
Adjusting
Vehicle
Function Command
Opens the main menu. ›Main menu‹
Open the options. ›Options‹
Open the settings. ›Settings‹
Settings on the Control Display. ›Control display‹
Open the time and date. ›Time and date‹
Open the language and units. ›Language and units‹
Open the speed limit. ›Speed‹
Open the light. ›Lighting‹
Open the door lock. ›Door locks‹
Seite 300
Reference Short commands for voice activation system
300
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Equipment
Function Command
Open the air conditioning settings. ›Climate‹
Open the Head-up Display. ›head up display‹
Enable the rear. ›Allow rear control‹
Vehicle information
Computer
Function Command
Open the computer. ›Onboard info‹
Open the trip computer. ›Trip computer‹
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the vehicle information. ›Vehicle info‹
Open the vehicle status. ›Vehicle status‹
Navigation
General information
Function Command
Navigation menu. ›Navigation‹
Open the destination entry. ›Enter address‹
Enter the address. ›Enter address‹
Enter the town/city. ›City‹
Enter the country. ›State‹
Enter the postal code. ›Postal Code‹
Open destination guidance. ›Guidance‹
Seite 301
Short commands for voice activation system Reference
301
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Function Command
Start destination guidance. ›Start guidance‹
Terminate destination guidance. ›Stop guidance‹
Open the home address. ›Home address‹
Open the route criteria. ›Route preference‹
Open the route. ›Route information‹
Switch on the spoken instruction. ›Switch on voice instructions‹
Repeat the spoken instruction. ›Repeat voice instructions‹
Switch off the spoken instruction. ›Switch off voice instructions‹
Display the address book. ›Address book‹
Display the most recent destinations. ›Last destinations‹
Open the traffic bulletins. ›Traffic Info‹
Special destinations. ›Points of interest‹
Map
Function Command
Display the map. ›Map‹
Map facing north. ›Map facing north‹
Map facing the direction of travel. ›Map in direction of travel‹
Perspective map. ›Map perspective view‹
Automatic scaling of the map. ›Map with automatic scaling‹
Scale...feet. ›Map scale ... feet‹
Scale...meters. ›Map scale ... meters‹ e.g., map scale
100 meters
Scale...kilometers. ›Map scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., map
scale 5 kilometers
Scale...miles. ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale
5 miles
Seite 302
Reference Short commands for voice activation system
302
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Split screen settings
Function Command
Split screen. ›Switch on splitscreen‹
Switch off the split screen. ›Turn off split screen‹
Adjust the split screen. ›Split screen content‹
Split screen, map facing north. ›Split screen map facing north‹
Split screen, current position. ›Split screen current position‹
Split screen, facing the direction of travel. ›Split screen map in direction of
travel‹
Split screen, perspective. ›Split screen perspective‹
Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹
Split screen scale...feet. ›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split
screen scale 100 feet
Split screen scale...meters. ›Split screen scale ... meters‹ e.g.,
split screen scale 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers. ›Split screen scale ... kilometers‹ e.g.,
split screen scale 5 kilometers
Split screen scale...miles. ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split
screen scale 5 miles
Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹
Split screen, computer. ›Split screen on board info‹
Split screen, trip computer. ›Splitscreen trip computer‹
Split screen, scale automatically. ›Split screen automatic scaling‹
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
Enter a new destination. ›Enter address‹
Trip list. ›Stored trips‹
Seite 303
Short commands for voice activation system Reference
303
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Radio
FM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g.,
93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5
Open the radio. ›Radio‹
Open the FM stations. ›F M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Select a frequency range. ›Select frequency‹
Open a station. ›Select station‹
AM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., fre‐
quency 753 or 753 kilohertz
Open the AM stations. ›A M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Satellite radio
Function Command
Open the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio‹
Switch on the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio on‹
Select a satellite radio channel. ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite
radio channel 2
Stored stations
Function Command
Open the stored stations. ›Presets‹
Choose a stored station. ›Select preset‹
Select a stored station. ›Preset ...‹ e.g., stored station 2
Seite 304
Reference Short commands for voice activation system
304
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
CD/multimedia
CD/DVD drive
Function Command
Select a track. ›Track ...‹ e.g., track 5
or
›C D track ...‹ e. g., CD track 5
Play back a CD. ›C D on‹
Select a CD. ›Select C D‹
Select a CD and track. ›C D ... track ...‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5
Open the CD and Multimedia menu. ›C D and multimedia‹
CD and DVD. ›C D‹
Select a DVD. ›D V D ...‹ e.g., DVD 3
Display the entertainment details on a split screen. ›Entertainment details‹
Music collection
Function Command
Search for music, open a menu. ›Music search‹
Open the current playback. ›Current playback‹
Open the music collection. ›Music collection‹
Play back the music collection. ›Music collection on‹
Play back the most frequently played tracks. ›Top fifty‹
External devices
Function Command
Open the external devices. ›External devices‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Seite 305
Short commands for voice activation system Reference
305
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Tone
Function Command
Open the tone settings. ›Tone‹
Telephone
Function Command
Dial a phone number. ›Dial number‹
Open the Telephone menu. ›Telephone‹
Display the phone book. ›Phonebook‹
Redialing. ›Redial‹
Display received calls. ›Received calls‹
List of messages. ›Messages‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Office
Function Command
Open the Office menu. ›Office‹
Display Office Today. ›Current office‹
Display the contacts. ›Contacts‹
Display the messages. ›Messages‹
Display the calendar. ›Calendar‹
Display the tasks. ›Tasks‹
Display the reminders. ›Reminders‹
Seite 306
Reference Short commands for voice activation system
306
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Contacts
Function Command
Select a name. ›Choose name‹
My contacts. ›My contacts‹
Open the contacts. ›Contacts‹
New contact. ›New contact‹
ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist
Function Command
Open BMW Assist. ›B M W Assist‹
Open ConnectedDrive. ›Connected Drive‹
Open BMW Online. ›B M W Online‹
Seite 307
Short commands for voice activation system Reference
307
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 96
ACC Active Cruise Con‐
trol 102
Accident, refer to Emergency
Request, initiating 286
Acoustic signal, refer to
Check Control 76
Activated-charcoal filter 126
Active Cruise Control
ACC 102
Active cruise control, indica‐
tor lamp 106
Active Cruise Control, radar
sensor 106
Active Cruise Control, select‐
ing the distance 104
Active Cruise Control, warn‐
ing lamps 106
Active seat 47
Active seat ventilation 46
Active steering 101
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 95
Adaptive Drive 100
Adaptive fixing system 140
Adaptive Light Control 82
Additional telephone 226
Additives, coolant 273
Additives, engine oil 272
After washing vehicle 292
Airbags 86
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 88
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated air mode 124
Air distribution, auto‐
matic 122, 127
Air distribution, manual 124
Air drying, refer to Cooling
function 124
Air flow rate 123
Air flow rate, blower, refer to
Air volume 127
Airing, refer to Ventila‐
tion 125
Air pressure, refer to Tire in‐
flation pressure 262
Air vents 121
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐
tion 125
Alarm system 39
Alarm system
–
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 40
– Ending an alarm 40
– Interior motion sensor 40
– Tilt alarm sensor 40
All around the headliner 17
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 268
All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 98
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 130
AM/FM station 182
Announcement, navigation,
refer to Spoken instruc‐
tions 171
Antifreeze, coolant 273
Antifreeze, washer fluid 66
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 96
Anti-slip control, refer to Dy‐
namic Stability Control
DSC 96
Anti-theft protection 32
Appointments 244
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 298
Approved engine oils 272
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to
Weights 298
Armrest, refer to Center arm‐
rest 138
Arrival time, refer to Com‐
puter 73
Ashtray 133
Ashtray, front 133
Ashtray, rear 133
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 287
Assistance with driving off,
refer to Drive-off assis‐
tant 100
Assistance with starting en‐
gine, refer to Jump-start‐
ing 287
Audio CD with rear DVD sys‐
tem 216
Audio device, external 138
Audio playback 191
Audio playback, Blue‐
tooth 205
Automatic, air distribu‐
tion 122, 127
Automatic air distribu‐
tion 127
Automatic, air flow rate 122
Automatic car wash 291
Automatic climate con‐
trol 121
Automatic climate control,
automatic air distribu‐
tion 122, 127
Automatic climate control, in
rear 126
Automatic climate control in
rear, activating on Control
Display 126
Seite 308
Reference Everything from A to Z
308
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Automatic climate control in
rear, air supply 127
Automatic climate control in
rear, deactivating on Control
Display 126
Automatic climate control in
rear, switching off 127
Automatic climate control,
switching off 125, 127
Automatic climate control,
ventilation in rear 126
Automatic climate control,
with 2-zone control 122
Automatic climate control,
with 4-zone control 126
Automatic, cruise control 109
Automatic Cruise Con‐
trol 102
Automatic Curb Monitor 52
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 81, 82
Automatic Hold 62
Automatic Hold, activating 62
Automatic Hold, deactivat‐
ing 62
Automatic Hold, parking 63
Automatic recirculated air
control 124
Automatic Soft Closing,
doors 35
Automatic tailgate opera‐
tion 36
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 67
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
–
Kickdown 67
AUTO program with auto‐
matic climate con‐
trol 122, 127
AUX-IN port 138, 202
Average fuel consumption 73
Average fuel consumption,
setting the units 79
Average speed 72
Average speed, refer to Com‐
puter 72
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 298
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 45
Backrest width 45
Back seats, adjusting the
head restraints 50
Backup camera 113
Backup camera, obstacle
marking 115
Backup camera, pathway
lines 114
Backup camera, turning
lines 114
Balance 180
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 287
Bass 180
Battery
–
Remote control 30
Battery change, remote con‐
trol for rear DVD sys‐
tem 212
Battery disposal 284
Battery, refer to Vehicle bat‐
tery 283
Battery replacement, remote
control for vehicle 39
Before entering the car
wash 291
Belts, refer to Safety belts 47
Belt tensioners, refer to
Safety belts 47
Beverage holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 139
Black and white map dis‐
play 174
Blower, refer to Air flow
rate 123
Bluetooth audio 205
Bluetooth connection, acti‐
vating/deactivating 227
BMW Apps 255
BMW EfficientDynamics, re‐
fer to Saving fuel 153
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 274
BMW Online 252
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 139
Brake assistant 96
Brake discs, breaking in 146
Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 74
Brake force display 95
Brake force distribution, elec‐
tronic 96
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
play 95
Brake lights, adaptive 95
Brake pads, breaking in 146
Brakes, BMW maintenance
system 274
Brakes, parking brake 61
Brakes, service require‐
ments 74
Brake system, BMW mainte‐
nance system 274
Braking, notes 147
Breakdown assistance 287
Breakdown, transporting the
vehicle 289
Breaking in 146
Brightness, on the Control
Display 79
Bulb replacement, refer to
Lamp and bulb replace‐
ment 276
Button for starting the engine,
refer to Start/Stop but‐
ton 59
C
Calendar 244
Calibration, driver's seat 49
Seite 309
Everything from A to Z Reference
309
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Camera, care 294
Camera, refer to Backup cam‐
era 113
Camera, side view 118
Camera, Top View 117
Can holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 139
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 283
Car care products 292
Care 291
Care, displays 294
Care, vehicle 292
Cargo 150
Cargo area
–
Comfort Access 38
Cargo area, capacities 298
Cargo area, enlarging 135
Cargo area lamp, refer to Inte‐
rior lamps 85
Cargo area lid, refer to Tail‐
gate 36
Cargo area, opening/closing,
refer to Tailgate 36
Cargo area, refer to Cargo
area 135
Cargo cover 135
Cargo, securing with ski bag,
refer to Securing cargo 142
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 151
Car key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 30
Carpet, care 293
Car phone, installation loca‐
tion, refer to Center arm‐
rest 138
Car phone, refer to Tele‐
phone 226
Car vacuum cleaner, connect‐
ing, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 133
Car wash 291
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 146
CBC, refer to Cornering Brake
Control 96
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 274
CD/DVD 190
CD/DVD changer 194
CD/DVD in rear 211
CD/DVD notes 196
CD, refer to Playing audio
tracks, rear DVD sys‐
tem 216
CDs, storing 197
Cell phone 226
Cell phone, installation loca‐
tion, refer to Center arm‐
rest 138
Center armrest, front 138
Center armrest, rear 138
Center brake lamp 280
Center console, refer to
Around the center con‐
sole 16
Central locking
–
Comfort Access 37
– From the inside 35
– Setting the unlocking char‐
acteristics 32
Central locking system
–
From the outside 32
– Principle 32
Central screen, refer to Con‐
trol Display 19
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 6
Changing wheels/tires 267
Chassis number, refer to En‐
gine compartment 270
Check Control 76
Children, transporting 54
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 55
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tems 54
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 54
Child safety locks 57
Child seat, mounting 54
Child seats, refer to Trans‐
porting children safely 54
Chrome parts, care 293
Cigarette lighter, connecting
electrical devices 133
Cigarette lighter, refer to
Lighter 133
Cigarette lighter socket 133
Circulation of air, refer to Re‐
circulated air mode 124
Cleaning, displays 294
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 291
Clock 70
Clock, 12h/24h mode 78
Closing
–
From the inside 35
– From the outside 32
Clothes hooks 138
Cockpit 12
Cold start, refer to Starting
the engine 60
Combination instrument, refer
to Instrument cluster 14
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signal/high beams/
headlamp flasher 64
Combination switch, refer to
Washer/wiper system 65
Comfort Access
–
Battery replacement 39
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 16
Compact wheel, inflation
pressure 262
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 59
Compartments, refer to Stor‐
age compart‐
ments 137, 138
Compass, digital 131
Computer 72
Computer, displaying infor‐
mation 72
Computer, displays on the
Control Display 73
Seite 310
Reference Everything from A to Z
310
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Concierge service 251
Condensation on windows,
removing 123
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 148
Condition Based Service
CBS 274
Confirmation signals for lock‐
ing/unlocking the vehicle 33
Connecting, mobile phone,
refer to Pairing the mobile
phone 227
Consumption, refer to Aver‐
age fuel consumption 73
Contacts 240, 248
Control Display 19
Control Display, care 294
Control Display, setting the
brightness 79
Controller, refer to Con‐
trols 18
Controls and displays 12
Controls, rear DVD sys‐
tem 210
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 96
Convenient operation
–
Glass sunroof 33
– Window 33
Coolant 273
Coolant, checking the
level 273
Coolant temperature 71
Cooling function, switching
on and off 124
Cooling, maximum 124
Cooling system, refer to Cool‐
ant 273
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 96
Corrosion on brake discs 148
Courtesy lamps, refer to Inte‐
rior lamps 85
Cradle for telephone or mo‐
bile phone, refer to Snap-in
adapter 237
Cruise control 109
Cruise control
– Malfunction 110
Cruise control, active 102
Cupholder 139
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 298
Current fuel consumption 71
Current location, storing 162
Curve lights, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 82
D
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 85
Dashboard, refer to Cock‐
pit 12
Data, technical 298
Date 70
Date, display format 79
Date, retrieving 70
Date, setting 78
Daytime running lights 82
Defroster, rear window 123
Defrosting windows 123
Defrost setting, refer to De‐
frosting windows 123
Destination entry via the ad‐
dress book 162
Destination guidance 169
Destination guidance with in‐
termediate destinations 167
Destination input, naviga‐
tion 160
Digital clock 70
Digital compass 131
Digital radio 183
Dimming mirrors 52
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 64
Display in front wind‐
shield 118
Display lighting, refer to In‐
strument lighting 85
Displays and controls 12
Displays, care 294
Displays, cleaning 294
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 14
Disposal, coolant 273
Disposal, vehicle battery 284
Distance control, refer to Ac‐
tive Cruise Control 102
Distance, selecting, with Ac‐
tive Cruise Control 104
Distance warning, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 111
Divided screen view, split
screen 22
Door key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 30
Door lock 34
Doors, manual operation 34
Doors, unlocking and locking
–
Confirmation signals 33
– From the inside 35
– From the outside 32
DOT Quality Grades 265
Downhill control 99
Draft-free ventilation 125
Drive-off assistant 100
Driver's seat, calibrating 49
Driving away on inclines, refer
to Drive-off assistant 100
Driving notes, breaking
in 146
Driving notes, general 146
Driving on poor roads 148
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 96
Driving through water 147
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 146
Dry air, refer to Cooling func‐
tion 124
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 96
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 97
DTMF suffix dialing 232
DVD/CD 190
DVDs, storing 197
Seite 311
Everything from A to Z Reference
311
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
DVD system in rear 210
DVD, video 192
Dynamic destination guid‐
ance 176
Dynamic Performance Con‐
trol 98
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 96
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 97
E
Easy entry/exit 53
EfficientDynamics, refer to
Saving fuel 153
Electrical malfunction
–
Door lock 34
– Driver's door 34
– Fuel filler flap 258
Electrical malfunction, park‐
ing brake 63
Electric seat adjustment 45
Electric steering wheel ad‐
justment 53
Electronic brake-force distri‐
bution 96
Electronic engine oil level
check 271
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control DSC 96
Emergency operation
–
Door lock, refer to Manual
operation 34
Emergency operation, fuel
filler flap, unlocking man‐
ually 258
Emergency Request 286
Emergency service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 287
Energy-conscious driving, re‐
fer to Current fuel consump‐
tion 71
Energy, saving, refer to Sav‐
ing fuel 153
Engine, breaking in 146
Engine compartment 270
Engine coolant, refer to Cool‐
ant 273
Engine oil, adding 272
Engine oil, additives, refer to
Approved engine oils 272
Engine oil, alternative oil
types 273
Engine oil, BMW maintenance
system 274
Engine oil change intervals,
refer to Service require‐
ments 74
Engine oil, checking the
level 271
Engine oil, filling ca‐
pacity 299
Engine oil temperature 71
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 272
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 272
Engine, overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 71
Engine start, assistance 287
Engine, starting 60
Engine, starting
–
Comfort Access 37
Engine, starting, Start/Stop
button 59
Engine, stopping, Start/Stop
button 59
Engine, switching off 60
Environmentally friendly driv‐
ing, refer to Current fuel
consumption 71
Equalizer 180
Equipment, interior 129
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control DSC 96
Exchanging wheels/tires 267
Exhaust system 146
Exterior mirrors 51
Exterior mirrors, adjusting 51
Exterior mirrors, automatic
dimming 52
Exterior mirrors, automatic
heating 52
Exterior mirrors, folding in and
out 52
External audio device 138
External devices 202
External temperature dis‐
play 70
External temperature display,
changing the units of meas‐
ure, changing the units of
measure on the Control Dis‐
play 79
External temperature warn‐
ing 70
Externel temperature dis‐
play 70
Eyes for securing cargo 151
F
Fader 180
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 76
False alarm
–
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 40
– Ending an alarm 40
Fastening safety belts, refer
to Safety belts 47
Fault messages, refer to
Check Control 76
Filling capacities 299
Filter, refer to Microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter 126
Fine wood, care 293
First aid kit 287
Fitting for towing 290
Fixing system, adaptive 140
Flashing when locking/
unlocking 33
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 88
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow
chains 269
Flat tire, run-flat tires 268
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 90
Seite 312
Reference Everything from A to Z
312
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Flat tire, warning lamp 89, 91
Flat tire, wheel change 280
Flooding, refer to Driving
through water 147
Floor carpet, care 293
Floor mats, care 293
FM/AM station 182
Fog on windows, remov‐
ing 123
Foldable rear seat back‐
rest 135
Foot brake 147
Footwell lamps, refer to Inte‐
rior lamps 85
For your own safety 6
Four-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 98
Front airbags 86
Front fog lamps 84
Front fog lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 278
Front fog lamps, indicator
lamp 84
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 88
Fuel 260
Fuel
–
Refer to Average fuel con‐
sumption 73
Fuel, additives 260
Fuel, average consump‐
tion 73
Fuel cap 258
Fuel cap, closing 258
Fuel consumption display
–
Average fuel consump‐
tion 73
Fuel consumption display,
current fuel consump‐
tion 71
Fuel-efficient driving, refer to
Current fuel consump‐
tion 71
Fuel filler flap, closing 258
Fuel filler flap, opening 258
Fuel filler flap, unlocking in
case of an electrical mal‐
function 258
Fuel gauge 72
Fuel, saving 153
Fuel tank capacity, refer to
Filling capacities 299
Fuel tank contents, refer to
Filling capacities 299
Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca‐
pacities 299
Fuse 284
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Universal Garage Door
Opener 129
Gasoline 260
Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel
gauge 72
Gasoline quality 260
Gas station recommenda‐
tion 171
Gear change, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 68
Gear change, via shift pad‐
dles 69
General driving notes 146
Glass sunroof, closing 43
Glass sunroof, electric
–
Convenient operation 33
– Remote control 33
Glass sunroof, initializing 43
Glass sunroof, opening 43
Glass sunroof, pinch protec‐
tion 43
Glass sunroof, power fail‐
ure 43
Glass sunroof, tilting 42
Glove compartment 137
Glove compartment, light‐
ing 137
GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐
gation system 158
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 298
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 61
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 130
Hands-free microphone 16
Hazard warning sys‐
tem 16, 286
HDC Hill Descent Control 99
HD Radio 183
Head airbags 86
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 81, 82
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 82
Headlamp flasher 64, 83
Headlamp flasher, indicator
lamp 15
Headlamps 81
Headlamps, care 292
Headlamps, cleaning 66
Headlamps, cleaning, washer
fluid 67
Headliner 17
Headphones, connecting,
rear DVD system 211
Head restraints 49
Head-up Display 118
Head-up Display, care 294
Heatable rear window 123
Heating 121
Heating
–
Seats 46
Heating, interior 121
Heating, mirrors 52
Heating, residual heat 125
Heating with the engine
switched off, refer to Resid‐
ual heat 125
Heavy cargo, refer to Stowing
cargo 151
Height, refer to Dimen‐
sions 298
High-beam Assistant 83
High beams 83
Seite 313
Everything from A to Z Reference
313
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
High beams/low beams, auto‐
matic, refer to High-beam
Assistant 83
High beams, indicator
lamp 15
High-pressure washers 291
Hill Descent Control HDC 99
Hill drive-off assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 100
Hills 148
Holder for beverages 139
Holder for remote control, re‐
fer to Ignition lock 59
Homepage 6
Hood 270
Hood, opening 270
Horn 12
Hot exhaust system 146
Hotline 253
House number, entering for
navigation 161
Hydraulic brake assistant 96
Hydroplaning 147
I
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 70
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 70
Identification marks, tires 265
iDrive 18
iDrive, changing settings 78
iDrive, changing the lan‐
guage 79
iDrive, changing the units of
measure and display for‐
mat 79
iDrive, setting the bright‐
ness 79
iDrive, setting the date 78
iDrive, setting the time 78
Ignition 60
Ignition key position 1, refer
to Radio ready state 59
Ignition key position 2, refer
to Ignition on 60
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 30
Ignition lock 59
Ignition, switched off 60
Ignition, switched on 60
Images, displaying, rear DVD
system 218
Indication of a flat tire 89, 91
Indicator and warning
lamps 15
Inflation pressure monitor, re‐
fer to Flat Tire Monitor 88
Inflation pressure, refer to
Tire inflation pressure 262
Information on the navigation
data 158
Initialization after power fail‐
ure 283
Initializing
–
Compass, refer to Calibrat‐
ing 132
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 89
Initializing, glass sunroof 43
Initializing, refer to Setting the
date 78
Initializing, refer to Setting the
time 78
Initializing, Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 91
Installation location, tele‐
phone 138
Instrument cluster 14
Instrument lighting 85
Instrument panel, refer to In‐
strument cluster 14
Instruments, refer to Cock‐
pit 12
Integrated key 30
Interactive map 165
Interior equipment 129
Interior lamps 85
Interior lamps
–
Remote control 33
Interior mirror 52
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming 52
Interior rearview mirror, com‐
pass 131
Interior temperature, setting,
automatic climate con‐
trol 121
Intermediate destina‐
tions 167
Internet page 6
Intersection, entering for navi‐
gation 161
iPod/iPhone 202
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 281
Jack, refer to Vehicle
jack 281
Joystick, refer to Selector
lever 67
Jump-starting 287
K
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 37
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 37
Key Memory, refer to Per‐
sonal Profile 30
Key, refer to Integrated key/
remote control 30
Kickdown
–
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 67
Knocking control 260
L
Label, run-flat tire 268
Lamp and bulb replacement,
lamp replacement 276
Lamps 81
Seite 314
Reference Everything from A to Z
314
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Lamps, automatic headlamp
control 81, 82
Lamps, High-beam Assis‐
tant 83
Lamps, parking lamps/low
beams 81
Lamps, replacing, refer to
Lamp and bulb replace‐
ment 276
Lane departure warning 93
Lane margin, warning 93
Language, changing on Con‐
trol Display 79
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer
to Safety belts 47
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 151
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 55
Leather, care 292
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 277
Length, refer to Dimen‐
sions 298
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 23
License plate lamps, replac‐
ing bulbs 280
Light-alloy wheels, care 293
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 277
Lighter 133
Lighting
–
Instruments 85
Lighting, vehicle, refer to
Lamps 81
Light switch 81
Limit, refer to Speed limit 77
Load 151
Loading 150
Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Locking 35
Locking
– From the inside 35
– From the outside 33
– Setting the confirmation
signals 33
– Without remote control, re‐
fer to Comfort Access 37
Locking the vehicle
– From the inside 35
– From the outside 32
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 57
Longlife oils, alternative oil
types 273
Longlife oils, refer to Ap‐
proved engine oils 272
Low beams 81
Low beams
–
Automatic 82
Low beams, automatic 81
Low beams, automatic, refer
to High-beam Assistant 83
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 45
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 152
Lumbar support 45
M
Main inspection, refer to
Service requirements 74
Maintenance 274
Maintenance, refer to Service
booklet
Maintenance, refer to Service
requirements 74
Maintenance require‐
ments 274
Maintenance system
BMW 274
Malfunction
–
Door lock 34
– Fuel filler flap 258
Malfunction, parking
brake 63
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 76
Manual air distribution 124
Manual mode, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 68
Manual operation
– Door lock 34
– Driver's door 34
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 258
Manual operation, Side
View 118
Manual operation, Top
View 116
Map, destination entry 165
Map display in black and
white 174
Map in split screen 173
Map view 171
Marking on approved
tires 268
Master key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 30
Maximum cooling 124
Maximum speed, winter
tires 268
Medical kit, refer to First aid
kit 287
Memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 50
Menus, operating, iDrive 18
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 19
Message list, traffic bulle‐
tins 173
Messages 242
Microfilter 126
Minimum tread, tires 266
Mirror
–
Mirror memory, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 50
Mirrors 51
Mirrors
–
Automatic Curb Monitor 52
Mirrors, folding in and out 52
Seite 315
Everything from A to Z Reference
315
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Mirrors, heating 52
Mirrors, interior mirror 52
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 147
Mobile phone, installation lo‐
cation, refer to Center arm‐
rest 138
Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐
phone 226
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 6
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 19
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 54
MP3 player 202
Multimedia 190
Music collection 197
Music search 198
Music, storing 197
N
Navigation 158
Navigation data 158
Navigation data, updat‐
ing 158
Navigation system
–
Destination entry by
voice 166
Neck restraints, refer to Head
restraints 49
Nets, refer to Storage com‐
partments 138
Neutral cleaner, care 293
New wheels and tires 267
Notes 6, 245
Nozzles of automatic climate
control 121
Nozzles, refer to Ventila‐
tion 125
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 275
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
sis 275
Octane number, refer to Fuel
quality 260
Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐
line quality 260
Odometer 71
Office 239
Oil additives 272
Oil consumption 271
Oil level 271
Oil, refer to Engine oil 271
Oil types, alternative 272
Oil types, approved 272
Old batteries, disposal 284
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 275
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 19
Onboard vehicle tool kit 276
Opening and closing
–
Comfort Access 37
– From the inside 35
– From the outside 32
– Using the door lock 34
– Using the remote control 32
Opening height, adjusting 36
Operating concept, iDrive 18
Outside-air mode, automatic
climate control 124
Outside air, refer to Recircu‐
lated air mode 124
Overheating of engine, refer
to Coolant temperature 71
P
Paint, vehicle 292
Pairing, mobile phone 227
Panic mode 33
Park Distance Control
PDC 111
Parked-car ventilation 127
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 148
Parking aid, refer to Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 111
Parking assistant, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 111
Parking brake 61
Parking brake, Automatic
Hold 62
Parking brake, releasing man‐
ually 62, 63
Parking brake, setting man‐
ually 61
Parking lamps 81
Parking lamps/low beams 81
Parking with Automatic
Hold 63
Passenger airbags, deactivat‐
ing 87
Passenger side mirror, tilt‐
ing 52
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 111
Personal information 239
Personal Profile 30
Pinch protection
–
Windows 41
Pinch protection, glass sun‐
roof 43
Plastic, care 293
Playing videos, rear DVD sys‐
tem 213
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 126
Poor road operation 148
Position, storing 162
Postal code, entering in navi‐
gation 161
Power failure 283
Power windows
–
Safety switch 42
Power windows, opening and
closing 41
Power windows, refer to Win‐
dows 41
Prescribed engine oils, refer
to Approved engine oils 272
Pressure, tires 262
Seite 316
Reference Everything from A to Z
316
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Pressure warning, tires 88
Profile depth, refer to Mini‐
mum tread depth 266
Profile, tires 266
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 23
Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection 43
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection
– Windows 41
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controls 18
R
Radiator fluid, refer to Cool‐
ant 273
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control with
integrated key 30
Radio ready state 59
Radio ready state, switched
off 60
Radio ready state, switched
on 59
Radio setting, refer to Radio
ready state 59
Rain sensor 66
Random 191
Random playback 191
Range 72
RDS 183
Reading lamps 85
Reading out loud 246
Rear entertainment, refer to
DVD system in rear 210
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 279
Rear seat backrest, folda‐
ble 135
Rear seats, adjusting the
head restraints 50
Rear seats, heating 46
Rear socket 134
Rear ventilation 126
Rear ventilation, automatic
climate control in rear 126
Rearview camera, clean‐
ing 115
Rearview mirror, refer to Mir‐
rors 51
Rear window defroster 123
Recirculated air mode 124
Recommended tire
brands 268
Redialing 233
Refueling 258
Remaining distance to desti‐
nation, refer to Com‐
puter 73
Remaining range for service,
refer to Service require‐
ments 74
Remaining range, refer to
Range 72
Reminders 246
Remote control
–
Battery replacement 39
– Comfort Access 37
– Garage door opener 129
– Malfunction 34, 39
– Tailgate 33
– Universal 129
Remote control, rear DVD
system 211
Remote control, removing
from the ignition lock 59
Remote control, service
data 274
Remote inquiry 232
Replacement fuse 284
Replacement remote con‐
trol 30
Replacing wheels/tires 267
Reporting safety defects 9
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 72
Reservoir for washer fluid, re‐
fer to Washer fluid reser‐
voir 67
Resetting, Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 91
Residual heat 125
Restraining systems
– Refer to Safety belts 47
Restraint systems for chil‐
dren 54
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 151
Retreaded tires 268
Rim cleaner, care 293
Road, avoiding 169
Road detour 169
Roadside Assistance 252
Roadside parking lamps 83
Roller sunblinds 42
RON gasoline quality 260
RON, refer to Fuel qual‐
ity 260
Roof load capacity 298
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 152
Rope, refer to Towing 289
Route 170
Route criteria, route 169
Route, displaying 170
Route section, bypass‐
ing 170
RSC Runflat System Compo‐
nent, refer to Run-flat
tires 268
Rubber components,
care 293
Run-flat tires 268
Run-flat tires, tire inflation
pressure 262
Running lights, refer to Park‐
ing lamps/low beams 81
S
Safe braking 147
Safety 6
Safety belts 47
Safety belts
–
Damage 48
Safety belts, care 293
Safety belts, indicator/warn‐
ing lamp 48
Seite 317
Everything from A to Z Reference
317
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Safety belts, reminder 48
Safety switch for rear win‐
dows 42
Safety systems
– Safety belts 47
Safety systems, airbags 86
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 268
Satellite radio 184
Saving fuel 153
Scale, changing during navi‐
gation 172
Screen, folding open/closed,
rear DVD system 210
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 19
Search, refer to BMW On‐
line 252
Seat adjustment, electric 45
Seat adjustment, manual 44
Seat and mirror memory 50
Seat belts
–
Refer to Safety belts 47
Seat heating 46
Seat heating, rear 46
Seats
–
Adjusting electrically 45
– Heating 46
– Memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 50
– Sitting safely 44
– Storing the setting, refer to
Seat and mirror memory 50
– Ventilation, refer to Active
seat ventilation and seat
heating 46
Seats, adjusting 44
Seats, backrest width 45
Seats, shoulder support 45
Selector lever, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 67
Selector lever lock, releas‐
ing 68
Self-leveling suspension 101
Sensors, care 294
Service and warranty 7
Service data in the remote
control 274
Service interval display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 274
Service interval display, refer
to Service requirements 74
Service requirements 74
Service requirements, CBS
Condition Based Serv‐
ice 274
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 287
Settings, clock, 12h/24h
mode 78
Settings, configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 30
Settings, DVD 193
Settings on the Control Dis‐
play, changing 78
Shifting, automatic transmis‐
sion with Steptronic 68
Shift paddles 69
Short commands, voice acti‐
vation 300
Side airbags 86
Side View 117
Side windows, refer to Win‐
dows 41
Size, refer to Dimensions 298
Ski bag 141
Slide/tilt glass roof, refer to
Glass sunroof 42
Slot for remote control 59
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 133
Snap-in adapter, mobile
phone 237
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Storage compartment of
center armrest 138
Snow chains 269
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nosis 275
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 133
Software applications,
iPhone 255
Software part number 226
Software update 208
SOS, refer to Emergency Re‐
quest, initiating 286
Sound output 182, 190
Spare fuse 284
Special destinations, naviga‐
tion 163
Special equipment, series
equipment 6
Speed, average 72
Speed limit 77
Speed limit, setting 77
Speedometer 14
Speed, with winter tires 268
Split screen 22
Split screen map set‐
tings 173
Spoken instructions, naviga‐
tion 171
Sport program, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 68
Spray nozzles, refer to Clean‐
ing the windshield and head‐
lamps 66
Spray nozzles, refer to Wind‐
shield washer nozzles 66
Stability control systems 96
Start/Stop button 59
Start/Stop button, starting the
engine 60
Start/Stop button, switching
off the engine 60
Starting the engine 60
Start problems, refer to
Jump-starting 287
State/province, selecting for
navigation 160
Stations, stored 188
Station, storing 182
Status information, iDrive 22
Status of Owner's Manual 6
Steam jets 291
Seite 318
Reference Everything from A to Z
318
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Steering wheel 53
Steering wheel, adjusting 53
Steering wheel, easy entry/
exit 53
Steering wheel lock 59
Steering with variable transla‐
tion, refer to Active steer‐
ing 101
Steptronic, refer to Sport pro‐
gram and manual mode M/
S 68
Stopping, engine 60
Storage compartment
nets 138
Storage compart‐
ments 137, 138
Storage, tires 268
Storing the seat position, re‐
fer to Seat and mirror mem‐
ory 50
Storing the vehicle 294
Street, entering for naviga‐
tion 161
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 262
Summer tires, tread 266
Sunblinds, roller sun‐
blinds 42
Surround View 113
Switches, refer to Cockpit 12
Switching off, engine 60
Switching off, vehicle 60
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 128
Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 71
Tailgate
–
Comfort Access 38
– Remote control 33
Tailgate, adjusting the open‐
ing height 36
Tailgate, automatic opera‐
tion 36
Tail lamps 279
Tank gauge, refer to Fuel
gauge 72
Tasks 245
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 6
Technical data 298
Telephone 226
Telephone, adjusting the vol‐
ume 230
Telephone, installation loca‐
tion, refer to Center arm‐
rest 138
TeleService 251
Temperature, adjusting in up‐
per body region 123
Temperature, coolant, refer to
Coolant temperature 71
Temperature display
–
External temperature 70
– External temperature warn‐
ing 70
Temperature display, setting
the units 79
Temperature, engine oil 71
Temperature, setting with au‐
tomatic climate con‐
trol 123, 127
Temperature warning 70
Text messages 242
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 39
Thigh support adjustment 44
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 280
Tilting the passenger side
mirror 52
Time, setting 78
Tire age 265
Tire identification marks 265
Tire inflation pressure 262
Tire inflation pressure, check‐
ing 262
Tire pressure monitor, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 88
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 90
Tire Quality Grading 265
Tires
– Inflation pressure 262
Tires, breaking in 146
Tires, changing 267
Tires, condition 266
Tires, damage 266
Tire size 265
Tires, minimum tread 266
Tires, retreaded tires 268
Tires, run-flat tires 268
Tires, storage 268
Tire tread 266
Toll roads, route 169
Tone 180
Tool kit, refer to Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 276
Tools, refer to Onboard vehi‐
cle tool kit 276
Top View 115
Tow bar 289
Tow fitting 290
Towing 289
Town/city, navigation 161
Tow rope 289
Tow-starting 289, 290
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 90
Traction control 97
Traffic bulletins, naviga‐
tion 173
Transmission, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 67
Transmission positions, auto‐
matic transmission with
Steptronic 67
Transporting children
safely 54
Treble, tone 180
Trip computer, refer to Dis‐
plays on the Control Dis‐
play 73
Trip-distance counter, refer
to Trip odometer 71
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 65
Trip odometer 71
Seite 319
Everything from A to Z Reference
319
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Trips, planning 167
Trunk lid, refer to Tailgate 36
Turning circle, refer to Dimen‐
sions 298
Turning lamps, refer to Adap‐
tive Light Control 82
Turn signal, indicator
lamp 14
Turn signals 64
Turn signals, triple turn signal
activation 65
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQG 265
Unintentional alarms, avoid‐
ing 40
Units, average fuel consump‐
tion 79
Units, temperature 79
Universal Garage Door
Opener 129
Universal remote control 129
Unlocking
–
From the outside 32
– Setting the unlocking char‐
acteristics 32
– Tailgate 38
– Without remote control, re‐
fer to Comfort Access 37
Unlocking, from the inside 35
Unlocking, hood 270
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 6
Update, software 208
Upholstery care 292
USB audio interface 202
USB interface 137
V
Vacuum cleaner, connecting,
refer to Connecting electri‐
cal devices 133
Vehicle
– Identification number 226
– Identification number, refer
to Engine compartment 270
Vehicle battery, chang‐
ing 283
Vehicle, breaking in 146
Vehicle care 292
Vehicle care, refer to
Care 291
Vehicle equipment 6
Vehicle jack 281
Vehicle paint 292
Vehicle storage 294
Vehicle, switching off 60
Vehicle wash 291
Ventilation 125
Ventilation, automatic climate
control in rear 127
Ventilation, draft-free 125
Ventilation, in rear 126
Ventilation, refer to Parked-
car ventilation 127
Vents of automatic climate
control 121
Version of the navigation
data 158
Video playback 192
Voice activation
–
Navigation 166
Voice activation, mobile
phone 235
Voice activation, short com‐
mands 300
Voice activation system 25
Volume, setting 180
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 15
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 76
Warning signal volumes 181
Warning triangle 287
Washer/wiper system 65
Washer/wiper system, rain
sensor 66
Washer/wiper system, washer
fluid 66
Washer/wiper system, wind‐
shield washer nozzles 66
Washer fluid 66
Washer fluid reservoir 67
Washing, vehicle 291
Waste tray, refer to Ash‐
tray 133
Water on roads, refer to Driv‐
ing through water 147
Weights 298
Welcome lamps 81
Wheelbase, refer to Dimen‐
sions 298
Wheel change 280
Wheels and tires 262
Wheels, changing 267
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 88
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 90
Width, refer to Dimen‐
sions 298
Window, Convenient opera‐
tion 33
Windows
–
Safety switch 42
Windows, defrosting and de‐
fogging, automatic climate
control 123
Windows, pinch protec‐
tion 41
Windshield, cleaning 66
Windshield, defrosting, refer
to Defrosting windows 123
Windshield wash 65
Windshield washer fluid 66
Windshield wash, reservoir for
washer fluid 67
Windshield wash, washer
fluid 67
Windshield wash, washer
nozzles 66
Seite 320
Reference Everything from A to Z
320
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 276
Windshield wiper, refer to
Washer/wiper system 65
Winter storage, care 294
Winter tires, setting the speed
limit 77
Winter tires, suitable
tires 268
Winter tires, tread 266
Wiper blades, changing 276
Wiper fluid 66
Wood, care 293
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 24
Working in the engine com‐
partment 270
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard vehicle tool kit 276
X
xDrive 98
Xenon headlamps 277
Y
Your individual vehicle
–
Settings, refer to Personal
Profile 30
Seite 321
Everything from A to Z Reference
321
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
01 40 2 910 876 ue
*BL291087600D*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 910 876 - VII/13
